文档内容
高中英语语法总结
第一章:词类、句子成分和构词法
第二章:名词
第三章:代词
第四章:数词
第五章:冠词
第六章:形容词、副词
第七章:介词
第八章:动词
第九章：连接词
第十章：简单句
第十一章：并列句、主从复合句
第十二章：直接引语和间接引语
第十三章：主谓一致
第十四章：动词时态
第十五章：情态动词
第十六章：动词不定式
第十七章：名词性从句
第十八章：It 的用法及其固定搭配
第十九章：倒装结构
第二十章：定语从句
第二十一章：被动语态
第二十二章：高中语法中的省略现象
1第一章 词类、句子成分和构词法
1、词类：英语词类分十种：
名词、形容词、代词、数词、冠词、动词、副词、介词、连词、感叹词。
1、名词(n.)： 表示人、事物、地点或抽象概念的名称。如：boy, morning, bag, ball, class,
orange.
2、代词(pron.)： 主要用来代替名词。如：who, she, you, it .
3、形容词(adj..)：表示人或事物的性质或特征。如：good, right, white, orange .
4、数词(num.)： 表示数目或事物的顺序。如：one, two, three, first, second, third, fourth.
5、动词(v.)： 表示动作或状态。如：am, is,are,have,see .
6、副词(adv.)： 修饰动词、形容词或其他副词,说明时间、地点、程度等。如：now, very,
here, often, quietly, slowly.
7、冠词(art..)：用在名词前,帮助说明名词。如：a, an, the.
8、介词(prep.)： 表示它后面的名词或代词与其他句子成分的关系。如in, on, from, above,
behind.
9、连词(conj.)： 用来连接词、短语或句子。如and, but, before .
10、感叹词(interj..)表示喜、怒、哀、乐等感情。如：oh, well, hi, hello.
2、句子成分：英语句子成分分为七种：主语、谓语、宾语、定语、状语、表语、宾语补足
语。
1、主语：
(1)由名词、代词(人称代词用主格)、动词不定式、动名词等充当,说明动作是“谁”发出
的，主语是句子陈述的对象，说明是谁或什么，表示句子说的是“什么人”，或”什么
事“，如“我写字”中的“我”，做出写字这个动作。“写”则是谓语，“字”是宾语，
是接受谓语“写”这个动作的对象，因此是宾语。如：The painter painted a very nice
picture. (画家画了一幅漂亮的画。) / They fought against SARS bravely. (他们勇敢地与
非典搏斗。) / To see is to believe. (耳听为虚眼见为实). / Helping animals is to help people.
(帮助动物就是帮助人类。)
(2)动词不定式或动名词做主语时可用 it 代替,而不定式或动名词移至表语或宾语之后。
如：It is very comfortable to have a Class A seat during the long journey. (在长途旅行中
能有个甲等座位简直太舒服了。) / Eating too much is bad for your health.(=It is bad for
your health eating too much.) (吃得太多对你的身体不利。)（比较好看，避免头重脚
轻）
(3)口语中常见主语或“主--系”省略：(It is) nothing. ((那)没有什么。)/ (It) doesn’t matter.
((那)没有关系。) / (I) thank you. ((我)谢谢你。)
(4)反意问句的附加问句,主语必须是代词：The man looks worried, doesn’t he? (这个人
看上去很着急不是吗？) / Tigers are dangerous animals, aren’t they? (老虎是危险的动
物不是吗？)
(5)祈使句一般省略主语。加主语时往往用来指定某个人。Keep the keyboards clean,
children. (孩子们请保持键盘的清洁。) (省略了主语) / You go there and fetch me a glass
of water. (你去给我弄一杯水来。)
(6)主语一般在句首,但在问句中会处于第二位和句尾；倒装句及 there be 句型主语在动
词之后。如：Computers are made in this factory. (计算机生产于这家工厂。) / Where
are they? (他们在哪儿？) / Does the boy like staying home? (这个男孩喜欢呆在家里
吗？)
(7)主语与谓语必须保持单、复数的一致, 而谓语与表语或宾语之间没有这一要求。
Neither Jim nor Rose has passed the exam. (Jim和Rose都没有通过考试。) / The Chinese
people are a hardworking and brave people. (中华民族是一个勤劳勇敢的民族。)
(8)主语可以由从句充当,详见“主语从句”。
2、谓语：是对主语动作或状态的陈述或说明，指出“做什么”，“是什么”或“怎么样”，
在主语后接宾语，又称受词，是一个动作的接受者。
(1)由“不及物动词”、“及物动词+宾语”或“系动词+表语”等构成,说明主语所表示的
2人物“干什么”或“怎么样”。如：
He travelled in space for the first time .(他首次在太空旅行。) / Who teaches you English
this year?(今年谁教你们的英语？) / The pizza has gone bad. (那块烤馅饼已经变坏。) /
(2)谓语动词必须反映出人称、单复数、时态等信息,谓语动词往往由下列词语依序排列
构成：［情态动词］+［时态助动词］（现在完成时）+［语态助动词］（如被动语
态）+［主要动词］(不一定全部出现)。(见动词的时态和语态构成表) 记住：谓语
部分第一个动词往往是变形动词。如：
I am sorry I am making so much noise but I have to. (对不起我发出了太大的声音但是
只能这样。) / He can’t have finished reading the 800-page-long novel. (他不可能读完
了那本长达800页的小说。) / Something must be done to stop the fowl flu from spreading
out. (该采取措施防止禽流感蔓延。)
(3)谓语动词切忌用“行为动词 + 原形动词”、“be + 原形动词”。
1
记住使用下列正确形式：
①情态动词+原形动词。如：You’d better go over the lesson.（你最好复习这一课。）
②shall/ will/ would+原形动词。如：They should have been there once.（他们应该去
过那儿。）
③be+现在分词或者过去分词。如：What are you doing this evening?（今晚你打算做
什么？）---表示一般将来时/ Many trees have been cut down since 1970s.（自从20
世纪70年代大批树木被砍伐。）
④have+过去分词。如：Many trees have been cut down since 1970s.（意思同上）
⑤一般时问句和否定句中：do/does/did+原形动词。如：He does not enjoy himself
very much.（他日子过的不好。）/ Did any of you see dinosaur eggs?（你们当中有
谁见过恐龙蛋吗？）
⑥行为动词 +行为动词 (不定式、动名词、现在分词、过去分词等形式)。如：He
1 2
made up his mind to be a vet.（他拿定主意要做个兽医。）/ Feeling good about
yourself is essential to feeling good about life.（自尊自爱是享受生活的根本。）/
They wake up the other family members, calling,“Merry Christmas!”（他们叫醒家
庭的其他成员,呼喊着：圣诞快乐！）/ The kings of ancient Egypt had strong tombs
built for themselves.（古代的埃及国王让人给他们自己修建坚固的坟墓。）
(4)不可用形容词、名词、代词、副词、介词短语等独立作谓语,必须在此之前加连系动
词。
(5)谓语动词单复数形式：单数形式的动词有：is,was,has,does以及“动词+s”；复数形
式的动词有：are,were,have以及动词原形。其他动词不分单、复数。
谓语部分第一个动词的形式 单数形式 复数形式
一般现在时be(是)动词； am (单一); are (单二); are
现在某些时态和语态的助动词be is (单三);
一般过去时be(是)动词； was (单一); were (单二); were
过去某些时态和语态的助动词be was;(单三)
一般现在时have(有)动词； have (单一); have (单二); have
现在完成时态的助动词have has (单三);
一般现在时行为动词和助动词do do (单一、单二); does (单三) do
实意动词和连系动词的一般现在 原形动词(单一、单二); 原形动词
时动词（否定和疑问句除外） 动词+s /es (单三)
其他各时态语态的谓语动词 单复数形式相同
记住：主语、谓语单复数必须保持一致。（参见“4、名词或代词作主语时和谓语之
间的单复数的一致问题：”） Air and water is necessary to us all.(空气和水对于我们
大家是必不可少的。)
(6)一般问句和反意问句的回答不使用行为动词,应该使用“是”动词、情态动词、助动
词(be,will,have,do以及变形)。如：The Olympic Games is held every other year, isn’t it?
----Yes, it is.(奥运会每两年举办一次,是吗？----是的。)
33、宾语：又称受词，是指一个动作（动词）的接受者。宾语分为直接宾语和间接宾语
两大类，其中直接宾语（经常指被做的人）指动作的直接对象，间接宾语说明动作
的非直接，但受动作影响的对象。一般而言，及物动词后面最少要有一个宾语，而
该宾语通常为直接宾语，有些及物动词要求两个宾语，则这两个宾语通常一个为直
接宾语，另一个为间接宾语。
(1) 由名词、代词(人称代词要用宾格)、不定式、动名词、(宾语)从句充当,表示动作的承受
者是“谁”或者是“何物”。如： The angel also came to Joseph and told him the same
thing.(那个天使同样来到约瑟夫面前并且告诉他同样的事情。)(代词和名词充当两个
宾语) / He told me that the company could not afford to pay him so much money.(他告诉
我说公司付不起他那么多的钱。) (不定式作宾语) / They enjoy watching football games
so much that they often forget their lessons. (他们如此喜爱看足球以至于常常忘记了他
们的功课。) (动名词作宾语) / I think to be a children’s doctor is very rewarding.(我认为
当个儿童医生是很值得的。) (从句作宾语)
(2) 只有及物动词或介词才有宾语,不及物动词没有宾语,如果涉及到事物,则必须在不及物
动词后面加合适的介词。Listen to the radio. (listen不是及物动词,故加to。) / Can you
hear anything exciting?(你能听到什么令人兴奋的消息吗？)
(3) 宾语一般放在及物动词或介词的后面,但是在疑问句中,如果宾语是疑问词,则宾语要放
在句首。介词的宾语如果是疑问词,则可以放在介词后或句首。如：What did he see?
(他看见了什么？) / What does he write a letter with? (他用什么写的信？) / With what
does he write a letter? (他用什么写的信？)
(4)“动词+副词+宾语”结构中,如果宾语是代词,则代词必须放在“动”“副”之间。如：
Please put the shoes away. (请把鞋子收起来。) / Please put away the shoes. (请把鞋子
收起来。) / Please put them away. (请把它们收起来。)
(5) 动词后面跟双宾语时可以采用两种结构：
①动词+间接宾语(人)+直接宾语(物)。如：He often gives me some help. (他常常帮我。)
②动词+直接宾语+介词+间接宾语。注意,一般情况介词用 to,但动词是 make, buy,
borrow时,介词用for.如： Please make me a kite. (请给我做个风筝。)或Please make
a kite for me.
(6) 在“动词+宾语+宾补”结构中,如果宾语是不定式、动名词、宾语从句,则常用 it 做形
式宾语,而将实际的宾语移到补语后面去。如：I found the job rather difficult. (我发觉
这个工作相当难做。) / I found it rather difficult to do the job.
(7) 宾语可以由从句充当,详见“宾语从句”。
4、表语：
(1) 说明主语的身份、性质、状况等含义的成分,通常由形容词、副词、介词短语、名词、
代词等充当。如：He became a doctor after he left high school.(高中毕业他当上了医
生。) / The rubber wheels are over there.(橡胶轮子在那边。) / He does not feel like eating
anything today because he has caught a bad cold.(他今天不想吃任何东西因为他得了重
感冒。) / Who is it?(谁呀？)
(2) 表语只能放在连系动词(如：be,look,become,turn get,grow,feel,seem) 之后,对表语进行
提问的句子除外。
(3) 代词做表语一般用主格,口语中常用宾。如：It’s I. (It’s me.)是我。
(4) 只能作表语的形容词有：sorry,afraid,alone,asleep,awake,ill,well,sure,interested 等等。
He was terribly sorry for his carelessness.(他很为他的粗心而歉疚。) / Please make no
noise here; the baby is asleep.(请不要发出响动,婴儿正熟睡呢。) / I am only interested
in sitting in a boat and doing nothing at all!(我只是对独坐孤舟无所事事感兴趣。) / I
am not alone in thinking so.(并非只有我才这样想的。)
(5) 表语也可以由从句充当,详见“表语从句”。
5、定语：
(1) 修饰名词或代词的成分,常由形容词、名词(含所有格)、代词(物主、指示、疑问、不
定)、介词短语、不定式(短语)充当,在初三阶段还学习了定语从句做定语的知识。如：
4Put it in the top drawer.(把它放在最上层的抽屉里。) / France and Switzerland are
European countries. (法国和瑞士是欧洲国家。) / His mother and father are both college
teachers.(他的父母都是大学教师。) / This is the day that I can never forget in my life.(这
是我一辈子难忘的日子。)
(2) 单词做定语时一般放在被修饰的名词前面,而且有一定的次序：
冠词/ 年龄/形状/ 质地/ 目的/ 被修饰的名
色彩 来源
物代 大小/温度 材料 用途 词(中心词)
a old,young,… red, Chinese, wooden, meeting, box,
the English,
long,short, yellow, woolen, tennis, shoes,
my American,
his round, square… blue, … glass, sports, room,
… silk, reading,
… big, large, pig
paper swimming,
small, little… …
… …
hot, cold,
warm, cool…
(3) 时间副词(now,then,today,yesterday,...)、地点副词(here,there,back,in,out,home,...作定语
时放在被修饰的名词后面。如：I could not find my way out, so I stayed there all along.
(我找不到出去的路,所以就一直呆在那儿。)
(4) 介词短语修饰名词时只能放在名词的后面：The monkey in the cage was caught
yesterday. (笼子里的猴子是昨天逮着的。)
(5) 形容词修饰复合不定代词时,往往后置。如：He remembered everything unusual. (他记
得所有不寻常的事情。)
(6) 定语还可以用从句充当,详见 定语从句。
(7) 注意：由于定语属于修饰性的成分,因此它常归入主语、宾语、表语之中,不作为句子
的主要成分。
6、状语：
(1) 说明动作“何时”、“何地”、“如何”发生,或者说明形容词或副词的程度,一般由副词、
介词短语、不定式、状语从句等充当。如：I was not born yesterday.（我又不是昨天
才出世的娃娃。）/ For many of these families a college education was something new.
（对其中的许多家庭来说,大学教育是件新事物。）/ He woke up to find his house on
fire.(他醒来发现房子着火了。) / You cannot leave until your work is finished.(在你的
工作被完成以前你不能离开)
(2) 副词作状语位置较为灵活,详见《六·2》“副词在句子中的位置以及作用”；介词短语
作状语,位置基本固定,详见《七·4》“介词短语在句子中的位置”；不定式作状语,一般
表示目的、结果,详见《八·7》“动词的非谓语形式”；从句作状语,详见《主从复合句》
的“状语从句”。
(3) 多个状语相连时,一般先单词、后短语,先地点、后时间,先小概念、后大概念。如：He
went ouf of the room at a quarter to 23:00 last night and then disappeared into the
dark.(他昨夜22点3刻从房间里出来,然后消失在黑暗之中。) /
(4) 状语还可以用从句来充当,有时间状语从句、地点状语从句、原因状语从句、目的状
语从句、结果状语从句、比较状语从句、让步状语从句、条件状语从句等。详见“状
语从句”。
(5) 注意：由于状语属于修饰性的成分,常归入谓语,因此不作为句子的主要成分。7、宾语
补足语：
(1) 补充说明宾语的动作、状态的成分为宾语补足语,常由名词、形容词、动词非谓语形
式(不定式、现在分词、过去分词等)、介词短语等充当。如：Call him Jim, please. (请
叫他Jim。) / I tried my best to make him happy. (我竭尽所能让他开心。) / Ask her to
come to dinner tomorrow. (请他明天来。) / He let the smaller animals bring food to him.
(他让小动物们给他带食物来。)
(2) 部分表示位置、方向的副词也可以作宾语补足语。如：Let him in, I tell you! (我跟你
5说,让他进来！)/ Please put it away. (请把它收起来。)
3、构词法：英语构词法主要有：合成法、派生法和转换法等。
1.转化法
英语中，有的名词可作动词，有的形容词可作副词或动词，这种把一种词性用作另一
种词性而词形不变的方法叫作转化法。
1)动词转化为名词
很多动词可以转化为名词，大多意思没有多大的变化(如下①)；有时意思有一定变化
(如下②)；有的与一个动词和不定冠词构成短语，表示一个动作(如下③)。例如：
①Let's go out for a walk.我们到外面去散散步吧。
②He is a man of strong build.他是一个体格健壮的汉子。
③Let's have a swim.咱们游泳吧。
2)名词转化为动词
很多表示物件(如下①)、身体部位(如下②)、某类人(如下③)的名词可以用作动词来
表示动作，某些抽象名词(如下④)也可作动词。例如：
①Did you book a seat on the plane?你订好飞机座位了吗?
②Please hand me the book.请把那本书递给我。
③She nursed her husband back to health.她看护丈夫，使他恢复了健康。
④We lunched together.我们在一起吃了午餐。
3)形容词转化为动词
有少数形容词可以转化为动词。例如：
We will try our best to better our living conditions.我们要尽力改善我们的生
活状况。
4)副词转化为动词
有少数副词可以转化为动词。例如：
Murder will out.(谚语)恶事终必将败露。
5)形容词转化为名词
表示颜色的形容词常可转化为名词(如下①)；某些形容词如old, young, poor,
rich, wounded, injured等与the连用，表示一类人，作主语时，谓语用复数(如下②)。
例如：
You should be dressed in black at the funeral.你在葬礼中该穿黑色衣服。
The old in our village are living a happy life.我们村的老年人过着幸福的生
活。
2.派生法
在词根前面加前缀或在词根后面加后缀构成一个与原单词意义相近或截然相反的新词
叫作派生法。
1)前缀
除少数前缀外，前缀一般改变单词的意义，不改变词性；后缀一般改变词类，而不引
起词义的变化。
(1)表示否定意义的前缀常用的有dis-, il-, im-, in-, ir-, mis-, non-, un-等，
在单词的前面加这类前缀常构成与该词意义相反的新词。例如：
appear出现→disappear消失
correct正确的→incorrect不正确的
lead带领→mislead领错
6stop停下→non-stop不停
(2)表示其他意义的前缀常用的有a-(多构成表语形容词), anti- (反对；抵抗),
auto- (自动), co- (共同), en- (使), inter- (互相), re- (再；又), sub- (下面的；
次；小), tele- (强调距离)等。例如：
alone单独的antigas防毒气的
autochart自动图表
cooperate合作enjoy使高兴
internet互联网reuse再用
subway地铁telephone电话
2)后缀
英语单词不仅可以通过加前缀构成新词，也可加后缀构成新词。后缀通常会改变单词
的词性，构成意义相近的其他词性；少数后缀还会改变词义，变为与原来词义相反的新
词。
(1)构成名词的后缀常用的有-ence，-(e)r/ -or (从事某事的人),-ese (某地人)，-
ess (雌性)，-ful (一……)，-ian (精通……的人)，-ist (专业人员)，-ment (性质；
状态)，-ness (性质；状态)，-tion(动作；过程)等。例如：
differ不同于→difference区别
write写→writer作家
Japan日本→Japanese日本人
act表演→actress女演员
mouth口→mouthful一口
music音乐→musician音乐家
(2)构成动词的后缀常用的有-(e)n (多用于形容词之后)，-fy (使……化)，-ize
(使……成为)。例如：
wide→widen加宽
beauty→beautify美化
pure→purify提纯
real→realize意识到
organ→organize组织
(3)构成形容词的后缀常用的有-al，
-able (有能力的)，-(a)n(某国人的)，-en (多用于表示材料的名词后)，-ern (方向
的)，-ese(某国人的)，-ful，-(ic)al，-ish，-ive，-less (表示否定)，-like (像……
的)，-ly，-ous，-some，-y (表示天气)等。例如：
nature自然→natural自然的
reason道理→reasonable有道理的
America美国→American美国的
China中国→Chinese中国人的
gold金子→golden金的
east东→eastern东方的
child孩子→childish孩子气的
snow雪→snowy雪的
(4)构成副词的常用后缀有-ly (主要用于形容词之后表示方式或程度)，-ward(s) (主
要用于表示方位的词之后表示方向)。例如：
7angry生气的→angrily生气地
to到→towards朝……，向……
east东方→eastward向东
(5)构成数词的后缀有-teen (十几)，-ty (几十)，-th (构成序数词)。例如：
six六→sixteen十六→sixteenth第十六
four四→forty四十→fortieth第四十
3.合成法
1)合成名词
构成方式例词
名词＋名词weekend周末
名词＋动词daybreak黎明
名词＋动名词handwriting书法
名词＋及物动词＋er／or pain-killer止痛药
名词＋介词＋名词editor-in-chief总编辑
代词＋名词she-wolf母狼
动词＋名词typewriter打字机
动名词＋名词reading-room阅览室
现在分词＋名词flying-fish飞鱼
形容词＋名词gentleman绅士
副词＋动词outbreak爆发
介词＋名词afternoon下午
2)合成形容词
名词＋形容词snow-white雪白的
名词＋现在分词English-speaking讲英语的
名词＋to＋名词face-to-face面对面的
名词＋过去分词man-made人造的
数词＋名词one-way单行的
数词＋名词＋形容词two-year-old两岁的
数词＋名词＋ed five-storeyed五层的
动词＋副词see-through透明的
形容词＋名词high-class高级的
形容词＋名词＋ed noble-minded高尚的
形容词＋形容词light-blue浅蓝色的
形容词＋现在分词good-looking相貌好看的
副词＋形容词ever-green常青的
副词＋现在分词hard-working勤劳的
副词＋过去分词well-known著名的
副词＋名词fast-food专门提供快餐服务的
介词＋名词downhill下坡的
3)合成动词
名词＋动词sleep-walk梦游
形容词＋动词white-wash粉刷
副词＋动词overthrow推翻
84)合成副词
形容词＋名词hotfoot匆忙地
形容词＋副词everywhere到处
副词＋副词however尽管如此
介词＋名词beforehand事先
介词＋副词forever永远
5)合成代词
代词宾格＋self herself她自己
物主代词＋self myself我自己
形容词＋名词anything任何东西
6)合成介词
副词＋名词inside在……里面
介词＋副词within在……之内
副词＋介词into进入
4.截短法(缩略法)
截短法，即将单词缩写，词义和词性保持不变，主要有截头、去尾、截头去尾等形
式。
1)截头
telephone→phone
aeroplane→plane
omnibus→bus
2)去尾
mathematics→maths
co-operate→co-op
examination→exam
kilogram→kilo
laboratory→lab
taxicab→taxi
3)截头去尾
influenza→flu
refrigerator→fridge
prescription→script
5.混合法(混成法)
混合法，即将两个词混合或各取一部分紧缩而成一个新词。后半部分表示主体；前半
部分表示属性。
news broadcast→newscast新闻广播
television broadcast→telecast电视播送
smoke and fog→smog烟雾
helicopter airport→heliport直升飞机场
6.首尾字母缩略法
首尾字母缩略法，即用单词首尾字母组成一个新词。读音主要有两种形式，即各字母
分别读音；作为一个单词读音。
very important person→VIP (读字母音)要人；大人物
9television→TV (读字母音)电视
Testing of English as a Foreign Language→TOEFL托福
第二章 名词
1、英语名词可分专有名词和普通名词两大类：
1、专有名词是个别的人、地、物、团体、机构等的专用名称。
专有名词中实词的第一个字母要大写。
如：Beijing, Tom, the People’s Republic of China(中华人民共和国)
专有名词如果是含有普通名词的短语,则必须使用定冠词the。如：the Great Wall(长
城)
姓氏名如果采用复数形式,则表示该姓氏一家人(复数含义),如：the Greens( 格林一家
人)。
2、普通名词是许多人或事物的共有名称。如：pupil, family, man, foot.
普通名词又分为可数名词和不可数名词。
▲可数名词是可以用简单的数词进行计数的名词,如： box, child, orange；
▲不可数名词是不可以用简单的数词进行计数的名词。如：water, news, oil, population,
information .
2、英语可数名词的单复数：英语可数名词有单数和复数两种形式。
1、名词由单数变复数的基本方法如下：
①在单数名词词尾加s。如：map → maps,boy→ boys,horse→ horses, table→ tables.
②s,o,x ,sh,ch结尾的词加es.如：class→classes, box→boxes, hero→heroes, dish→dishes,
bench→benches.
[注]：少数以o结尾的词,变复数时只加s。如：photo→photos, piano→pianos.
③以辅音字母加y结尾的名词,变y为i,再加es。如：family→families, city→cities,
party→parties.
④以f或fe结尾的名词,变f或fe为v,再加es。如：shelf→shelves, wolf→wolves, life→
lives, knife→knives.
2、不规则变化：man→men, woman→women, sheep→sheep,tooth→teeth, fish→fish, child
→children, ox→oxen, goose→geese
不可数名词一般没有复数形式,说明其数量时,要用有关计量名词。如：a bag of rice→
two bags of rice, a piece of paper→three pieces of paper, a bottle of milk→five bottles of
milk.
3、名词所有格：
1、 名词所有格表示所属关系,相当于物主代词,在句中作定语、宾语或主语。其构成法
如下：
(1)表示人或其它有生命的东西的名词常在词尾加’s。如：Childern’s Day(儿童节), my
sister’s book(我姐姐的书)
(2)以s或es结尾的复数名词。只在词尾加’。如：Teachers’ Day(教师节)
(3)有些表示时间、距离以及世界、国家、城镇等无生命的名词,也可在词尾加’s. 如：
today’s newspaper(今天的报纸), ten minutes’ break(十分钟的课间休息),
China’s population(中国的人口).
(4)无论表示有生命还是无生命的东西的名词,一般均可用介词 of 短语来表示所有关系。
如：
a fine daughter of the Party(党的好女儿).
2、[注解]：
① ‘s还可以表示某人的家或者某个店铺,如：my aunt’s(我阿姨家), the doctor’s(诊所)
② 两人共有某物时,可以采用 A and B’s 的形式,如：Lucy and Lily’s bedroom(露西和丽
丽合住的卧室)
③ “of+名词所有格/名词性物主代词”,称为双重所有格,如：a friend of my father’s(我
10父亲的一位朋友), a friend of mine(我的一位朋友)
4、名词或代词作主语时和谓语之间的单复数的一致问题：
1、谓语和谓语基本保持单复数的一致,即：主语是可数名词单数或不可数名词时,谓语动词
用单数形式：如：The computer was a great invention.(计算机是个了不起的发明)The
water in the glass is very cold.(玻璃杯里的水很冷)
2、集体名词(如family, class, team, group, row, police, school等)做句子主语时,
① 如果表示整体概念,则谓语用单数形式,如：Class Three is a very
good class.(三班是好班)
② 如果表示其中的所有成员时,则谓语用复数形式,如：Class Three
have a map of China.(三
班有张中国地图)
3、Chinese, Japanese, fish, sheep, people 等表示单个时谓语用单数,表示许多时,谓语用复
数。如：There is a sheep in the yard.(院子里有只绵羊) / There are some sheep in the
yard.(院子里有一些绵羊)
4、maths, news等虽然有s结尾,但不是复数,因此谓语仍用单数：The news is very exciting.
(这个消息令人兴奋)
5、glasses, shoes, socks, trousers, gloves等名词往往用复数形式,故谓语用复数。如：
The trousers are very cheap and I want to take them.(裤子很便宜,我想买)
6、a lot of 后跟名词复数时谓语用复数形式,跟不可数名词时谓语用单数形式。如：A lot of
students are playing baseball now.(现在有许多学生在打垒球) A lot of time was
wasted on that work.(大量的时间花在了那个工作上)(被动句)
7、and 连接两个名词做主语时,谓语原则上用复数,但是两个名词若构成一个整体事物时,
谓语则用单数。如：The teacher and his son are picking apples now.(老师和他的儿子
在摘苹果) / Fish and chips is very famous food. (鱼和薯条是一种出名的食品)
8、 there be 句型中 be 的单复数一般由靠近的名词决定。如：There is a table and four
chairs in the room.(房间里有一张桌子和四张椅子)
9、用 both…and…连接两个事物做主语时,谓语一般用复数。如：Both you and I are
required to be here tomorrow.(你和我明天要求都来)
10、主语中含有with的短语时,谓语单复数由with之前的人物决定。如：A woman with a
7-year-old child was standing at the side of the road. (一名妇女带着一个七岁的孩子(当
时)就站在路边)
11、either…or…或者 neither…nor…连接两个人物做句子主语时,谓语采用就近原则。如：
Either you or he is right.(要么是你对,要么是他对。/你和他有一个人是对的) / Neither
you nor I am going there.(你和我都不打算去那里)
12、表示一段时间或长度概念的复数名词做主语时,谓语一般用单数。如：Two months is
not a short time.(两个月不是个短时间)Two thousand kilometers is quite a long
distance(距离).(两千千米是相当长的一段距离)
13、主语中含有half of… / (three quarters)of… / all (of) the ….等词语时,谓语的单复数由名
词确定,如：Over three quarters of the information on the Internet is in English.(因特网
上四分之三以上的信息是用英语写的) / A third of the students were playing near the
lake.(学生的三分之一(当时)正在湖边玩耍) / All of the water in these rivers has been
polluted.(这些河流中的水已经被污染了)(被动句)
但是,population一词又有特殊情况： What’s the population of China?(中国人口是多
少？)(句子用单数) / Three quarters of the population in this city are Arabs(阿拉伯
人).(这个城市四分之三的人口是阿拉伯人)(句子用复数)
5、部分名词用法辨析：
1、sport、game、match、race 的区别：sport 通常指“户外运动”,以锻炼为主,概念较
大；game 意思是“运动、比赛”,不管户内户外还是脑力体力,指以胜负为主的运动；
match意为“竞赛、比赛”,多指正式比赛；race主要表示“赛跑、赛马、赛车”。如：
People all around the world enjoy sports.(全世界的人都喜爱运动) / The 2008 Olympic
11Games will be held in Beijing.(2008奥运会将在北京举行)(被动句) / Our school football
team won the league match(联赛).(我们学校足球队取得了联赛冠军) / They were strong
and won the boat race.(汤他们很棒,赢得了划艇比赛)
2、festival、holiday、vacation 的区别：festival“节日”,指喜庆的日子或持续一段时间的
文娱活动；holiday(假日、休息日),指法定假日或风俗习惯,复数可以表示一个较长的假
期；vacation“假期”,指学习或工作中一段长时间的休息。如：The Shanghai Television
Festival will be held next month.(上海电视节将在下个月举行) / Sunday is a holiday and
most people do not work.(星期天是个假日,多数人不工作) / What are you going to do
during the summer vacation/holidays?(在暑期你打算做什么事情？)
3、journey、tour、trip、travel的区别：journey指在陆地上(或海上或空中)进行的长途旅
行,不知终点,含有辛苦的意思；tour指途中作短期逗留的巡回旅行,强调游览多处,常用
来指观光等；trip通常指往返定时的短途旅行,如出差度假等；travel多指长期或长途
的观光旅行,尤其指到国外,没有明确目的地,也作不可数名词,指旅行这一行为。如：He
made up his mind to make the journey to Dunhuang.(他拿定主意要去敦煌旅行)/ He has
gone on a walking tour.(他步行观光去了) / He took several trips to Shanghai last
yeaar.(去年他去了上海好几次) / Did you go to Santiago(圣地亚哥) during your
travels?(旅行期间你去圣地亚哥了吗？) / Travelling through thick forests is
dangerous.(在密林里边穿行是很危险的)
4、sound、noise、voice的区别：sound指各种声音；noise主要指“噪音”；voice指人的
“嗓音”。如：The noise of the street kept me awake in the night.(街上的喧嚣声让我彻
夜难眠) / All of a sudden there was the sound of shots and a cry.(突然间传来几声枪响和
一声尖叫) / The singer has lost her ringing voice as a result of a bad cold.(因为感冒的缘
故,这个歌唱家失去了她银铃般的嗓音)
5、fish 的问题：指许多条鱼且不管种类时,用 fish,单复数相同；fishes 指许多种类的鱼；
fish指“鱼肉”时是不可数名词。如：There are many kinds of fishes in the pool. (池子
里有很多种类的鱼)/ I prefer fish to meat.(与肉相比我更喜欢鱼)
第三章 代词
1、代词的分类：英语中代词分为：人称代词、物主代词、反身代词、指示代词、关系代词、
疑问代词、连接代词和不定代词等等。
2、人称代词：人称代词代替人和事物的名称,分为主格和宾格两种形式。
第 三 人 称 单 数 第 一 第 二
第 一 人 第 二 人
阳 性 阴 性 中 性 人 称 人 称 第三人称复数
称 单 数 称 单 数
复数 复数
主 I you (你) he she it we you they (他们,
格 (我) (他) (她) (它) (我们) (你们) 她们,它们)
宾 me you (你) him her it us you them (他们,
格 (我) (他) (她) (她) (我们) (你们) 她们,它们)
1、主格用来作句子的主语、表语。如： I often go shopping on Sundays.(星期天我常去
购物) / Are they from Brazil?(他们是巴西人吗？) / Where have they gone?(他们上哪
儿去了？) / That’s it.(就那么回事) / It’s he!(是他！)
2、宾格用来作及物动词或者介词的宾语。如：Who teaches you English this year?(今年
谁教你们的英语？) / Help me!(救救我！) / We often write letters to her.(我们常给
他写信)
3、人称代词作表语或者放在比较状语从句连词than或as之后时,可以用主格形式,也可
以用宾格形式,口语中大多用宾格。如：--Who is it?(是谁？) –It’s I/me.(是我。)
4、 三个不同人称同时出现,或者主语中包含“我”时,按照“you→he→I”的顺
序表达。如：
12Both he and I are working at that computer company.(我和他都在那家电脑公司上班)
–Who will go there?(谁要去那儿？) –You and me.(你和我)
5、 人称代词it除了可以指人指物之外,还可以表示“时间、天气、温度、距离、情况”
等含义,此外还可以作“非人称代词”使用,替代作主语或者宾语的不定式、动名词
或者名词性从句。如：--What’s the weather like today?(今天天气怎样？)—It’s fine.(天
气晴好) / --What’s the time?(几点啦？) –It’s 12：00.(12点) / It’s a long way to go.(那
可要走好长的路) / It took him three days to clean his house.(打扫屋子花了他三天的
时间) / It is very clear that the public want to know when these men can go into space.(很
显然,公众想知道这些人什么时候能进入太空) / We found it very difficult to learn a
foreign language well.(我们发觉要学好一门外语是非常困难的)
3、物主代词：说明事物所属关系的代词,分为形容词性和名词性两种。
第 三 人 称 单 数 第一人
第一人 第 二 人 第二人
阳 性 阴 性 中 性 称复 第 三 人 称 复 数
称单数 称 单 数 称复数
数
形 容 my your his her its our your their (他们的,她们
词 性 (我的) (你的) (他的) (她的) (它的) (我们 (你们 的,它们的)
的) 的)
名词 mine Yours his hers its ours yours theirs(他们的,她们
性 (我的) (你的) (他的) (她的) (她的) (我们 (你们 的,它们的)
的) 的)
1、形容词性物主代词只能作句子中名词的修饰语,后面要跟名词。如：
Is that your umbrella?(那是你的伞吗？) / I often go to see my aunt on Sundays.(我经
常在星期天去看望阿姨) / They are their books.(是他们的书)
2、名词性物主代词相当于名词,既代替事物又表明所属关系,在句子中往往独立地作主
语、宾语或者表语,后面千万不可以跟名词。如：
This is your cup,but where is mine?(这是你的杯子,可我的在哪儿？) / Your
classroom is very big, but ours is rather small.(你们的教室很大,我们的相当小)
3、“of + 名词性物主代词”称为双重所有格,作定语时放在名词的后面。如：
A friend of mine came to see me yesterday.(我的一个朋友昨天来看我了) (指若干朋友
中有一个来看我。)
[试比较] My friend came to see me yesterday.(我的朋友昨天来看我了)(指我的那个
特定的朋友来看我。)
4、反身代词：表示谓语的动作与主语有关或者宾语补足语的动作与宾语有关。
反身代词是一种表示反射或强调的代词。它的基本含义是：通过反身代词指代主语，使施动
者把动作在形式上反射到施动者自己。因此，反身代词与它所指代的名词或代词形成互指关
系，在人称、性、数上保持一致。
第一人 第 二 人 第 三 人 称 单 数 第一人称 第二人称
第三人称复数
称单数 称 单 数 阳 性 阴 性 中 性 复数 复数
myself yourself himself herself itself ourselves yourselves themselves
(我自己) (你自己) (他自己) (她自己) (它自己) (我们自己) (你们自己) (他们/她们
/它们自己)
1、反身代词在句子中作宾语表示反射(指一个动作回到该动作执行者本身)。如：
Don’t play with the knife, you might hurt yourself.(不要玩刀子,那会割伤你的)
2、在句子中作同位语表示强调(即用来强调名词或代词的语气)。如：
The story itself is good. Only he didn’t tell it well.(故事本身是好的,只是他没有讲好)
6、 指示代词： 指示说明近处或者远处、上文或者下文、以前或者现在的人或事物。
单数 复数 含义
this(这个) these(这些) 指较近的人和物
that(那个) those(那些) 指较远的人和物
13such (这样的人/物) 指上文提过的人和物
same (同样的人/物) 指和上文提过的相同的人和物
it (这人/这物) 指不太清楚是谁或者是什么时
指示代词既可以单独使用做句子的主语、宾语或表语,也可以作定语修饰名词。如：
What’s this?(这是什么？) / That model plane is made of plastic.(那只模型飞机是塑料做
的)(被动句) / Remember never to do such things.(记得永远不要做这样的事情) / Do the
same as the teacher tells you. (按老师说的做)/ ---Who is it?(是谁？) ---It’s me!(是我！)
6、关系代词：用来引导定语从句的代词叫关系代词,参见后面的定语从句。
1、关系代词 who 、which、 that 、whom 等,将定语从句和主句连接起来。英语中的
关系代词一方面在从句中担任一定的成分,另一方面又起连接作用。
如：The student who is drawing a picture is in Grade One.(正在画画的学生是一年级
的)
2、关系代词who / whom指人,如果作从句的宾语,则有时省略。如：
Do you know the man who is wearing a red hat? (你认识那个戴着红帽子的男人吗？)
3、关系代词which 指物,如果作从句的宾语,则有时省略。如：Have you found the book
which you lost several days ago?(你找到几天前丢失的那本书了吗？)
4、关系代词 that 既可指人也可指物,如果作从句的宾语,则有时省略。如：Can you see
the man/dog that is running along the river bank ?(你看得见顺着河跑的男人/狗了
吗？)
7、连接代词：用来引导宾语从句、主语从句或表语从句的连接词称连接代词。
英语中连接代词主要有：what(什么),who(谁),whom(谁),which(哪个),whose(谁的)。详见
相应从句。
8、不定代词：代替或修饰不特指的人或事物的代词叫不定代词。
单数 each either, the other, 复合不
/ / one so
含义 (every) neither another 定代词
不可数 some no little,
much / / /
含义 any none a little
all / /
复数 few, others,
many ones both
含义 a few the others
※ 注：复合不定代词有12个：something(某事), someone(某人), somebody(某
人), anything
(任何事), anyone(任何人), anybody(任何人), nothing(没事),nobody(没有人), no
one(没有人), everything(一切), everyone(每个人), everybody(每个人).
(1)some和 any 的用法：
some 一般用于肯定句中,意思是“几个”、“一些”、“某个”作定语时可修饰可数名词
或不可数名词。如：I have some work to do today. (今天我有些事情要做)/ They
will go there some day.(他们有朝一日会去那儿)
some 用于疑问句时,表示建议、请求或希望得到肯定回答。如：Would you like some
coffee with sugar?(你要加糖的咖啡吗？)
any 一般用于疑问句或否定句中,意思是“任何一些”、“任何一个”,作定语时可修饰
可数或不可数名词。如：They didn’t have any friends here. (他们在这里没有朋
友)/ Have you got any questions to ask?(你有问题要问吗？)
any 用于肯定句时,意思是“任何的”。Come here with any friend.(随便带什么朋友来
吧。)
(2)no和none的用法：
no是形容词,只能作定语表示,意思是“没有”,修饰可数名词(单数或复数)或不可数名
词。如：There is no time left. Please hurry up.(没有时间了,请快点) / They had no
reading books to lend.(他们没有阅读用书可以出借)
none只能独立使用,在句子中可作主语、宾语和表语,意思是“没有一个人(或事物)”,
表示复数或单数。如：None of them is/are in the classroom.(他们当中没有一个在教
14室里) / I have many books, but none is interesting.(我有很多的书,但没有一本是有趣
的)
(3)all和both的用法：
all指三者或三者以上的人或物,用来代替或修饰可数名词；也可用来代替或修饰不可
数名词。
both指两个人或物,用来代替或修饰可数名词。all和both在句子中作主语、宾语、表
语、定语等。如：I know all of the four British students in their school.(他们学校
里四个英国学生我全认识) / --Would you like this one or that one? –Both.(你要这
个还是那个？两个都要。)
all 和 both 既可以修饰名词(all/both+(the)+名词),也可以独立使用,采用“all/both + of
the +名词(复数)”的形式,其中的 of 可以省略。如：All (of) (the) boys are
naughty.(是男孩都调皮)
(4)every和each用法：
every是形容词,只能作定语修饰单数名词,意思是“每一个”,表示整体概念；
each是形容词、代词,可用作主语、宾语、定语等,意思是“每个”或者“各个”,表示
单个概念；each可以放在名词前,可以后跟of短语,与动词同时出现时要放在“be
动词、助动词、情态动词”之后或者行为动词之前
every 和 each 都用作单数理解,但是下文中既可以用单数的代词(如 he/him/his)也可以
用复数的代词(如they/them/their)替代。如：Every one of the students in his class
studies very hard.(他班上每个学生学习都很用功) / They are very busy. Each of
them has something to do.(他们很忙,人人都有事干)
(5)either和neither的用法：
either意思是“两个中间的任何一个”；neither是either的否定形式,意思是“两个都
不”。
neither和either在句子中可作主语、宾语和定语等,都用作单数。如：I don’t care much
for what to drink. Either of the two will do. (我不介意喝些什么,两个之中随便哪个
都行) / --Will you go there by bus or by car? –Neither. I will go there by train.(你坐
公车去还是坐轿车去？一个都不坐,我坐火车去。)
(6)other、the other和another的用法：
other意思是“另一”、“另一些”,有复数形式。在句子中可作主语、宾语和定语。another
意思是“另外”、“又一个”,表示增加,在句中可作宾语和定语。如：
Some girls are singing under the big apple tree and others are sitting on the grass
talking.(有些女孩在大苹果树下唱歌,别的就躺在草地上说话) / You have had
several cakes. Do you really want another one?(你已经吃了好几块饼子了,你真的
还要一块？) / I want another four books.(我还要四本书)
another(另外的,再一,又一)与the other(另外的一个) 主要从数量上区分,只有两个时用
the other,在原先基础上增加用another。如： This is one of your socks. Where is
the other one?(这是你的一只袜子,还有一只呢？) / I have eaten 4 cakes, but I still
want another.(我已经吃了4块蛋糕,但是我还要以块。)
others与the others的主要区别：others指“剩余的人/物”(指大部分)；the others指
“其余的人/物”,(指全部)。如：A few students are playing soccer while others are
watching them.(有几个学生在踢足球,其他一些人在观看) / Two of the ten boys are
standing and the others are sitting round them.(十个男孩中有两个站着,其他人都
围着他们坐着。)
(7)many和much的用法：
many 意思是“很多”,与可数名词复数连用；much 意思是“很多”,与不可数名词连
用。它们在句中可作主语、宾语和定语等。如：I don’t have many friends here.(在
这里我没有很多的朋友。) /Many died in the bus accident.(许多人在公交车祸中丧
失) / We can learn much with the help of him.(在他的帮助之下我们能学到很多)
many和much一般用于否定句,肯定句中通常用a lot of 或者lots of; many / much用
于肯定句时可以在前面加上so、very或too.如： There are a lot of people on the
15playground.(操场上有许多的人)/ They haven’t got much work to do.(他们没有多少
事情可做) / There are too many people in the room.(房间里人太多了。)
(8)few、little、a few、a little的用法：
few、little意思是“很少几个”、“几乎没有”,有否定的意思,a few、a little意思是“有
几个”、“有些”,有肯定的意思 ；few、a few与可数名词连用或代替可数的事物, little、
a little与不可数名词连用或代替不可数的事物。它们在句中可作主语、宾语和定语。
如：
He is very poor and he has little money.(他很穷,几乎没有什么钱。) / Don’t worry.
There is still a little time left.(别着急,还有一点儿时间呢。) / In that polar region there
live few people.(在那个极地地区几乎不住人) / You can get a few sweets from him.(你
可以从他那儿弄到一些糖果)
(9)复合不定代词somebody ,something ,anything, nothing ,everything, everybody等是由some ,
any ,no ,every, 加上body, thing 构成的,叫做复合不定代词,在句子中当单数使用。
somebody, something, someone 一般用于肯定句中；anything, anybody,anyone一般用
于疑问句、否定句和条件状语从句中。修饰复合不定代词的定语,应放在它们的后面。
如：Hey,Lily. There is someone outside the door.(嗨,丽丽,门外有人。) /Di(每个人)d you
meet anyone when you came to school last Sunday?(上个星期天你来学校时见到什么人
了吗？)/He has nothing much to do today.(他今天没有多少事情做)
(10)one与ones用来代替上文的一个或多个人或事物,前面可以加冠词、形容词、指示代词、
which等。如： Which jacket would you like, this one or that one?(你要哪件夹克,这件
还是那件？ / I don’t like the green ones.(我不喜欢绿色的那些)
(11)so可以代替一件事情,作句子的宾语或表语。如： I don’t think so.(我认为不是这样的。)
/ He lost a book. So did I.(他丢失了一本书,我也是。)
(12)a lot of、lots of、a number of( /large numbers of)、a great deal of、plenty of的区别：五
个“名词+介词”短语都表示“大量,许多”,a lot of(或lots of)既可以修饰不可数名词
也可以修饰可数名词的复数形式,可以相应地换为 much 和 many；plenty of“足够、
大量”,既可以修饰不可数名词也可以修饰可数名词的复数形式。 a number of / large
numbers of只可以修饰可数名词复数形式(它修饰的词作主语时谓语用复数形式)可以
换为some、many、a lot of、plenty of。 a great deal of只可以修饰不可数名词(它修饰
的词作主语时谓语用单数形式)可以换为much。
如：A lot of people think that time is money.(许多的人认为时间就是金钱。) / I don’t have
to do it in a hurry because I have plenty of time.(我用不着赶忙,因为我有充足的时间。)
/ I have a number of letters to write today.(今天我有好多信要写) / I spend a great deal of
time/money on shopping.(在购物方面我花费了大量的时间/金钱。)
(13)none、no one、nobody的区别：no one和nobody都表示“没有人”,仅指人,后面不跟
of 短语,作主语时谓语用单数形式；none表示“没有一个人/物”,可指人也可以指物,
后面可跟 of 短语,作主语时谓语可用单数也可用复数。如：No one knows how he
managed to get the ticket.(没有人知道他是怎样搞到那张票的) / Nobody handed in
his/their composition(s) yesterday.(昨天没有一个人交作文。) / None of my friends came
to see me that day.(那天没有一个朋友来看我。)
9、相互代词：表示相互关系的词叫相互代词。
each other ,one another是相互代词,译成“互相”,可以通用。each other表示两者之
间,而one anther表示许多人之间。它们有所有格形式each other’s ,one another’s。如：
We must help each other when we are in trouble.(我们身处困境时要互相帮助。) / They
sat there without talking to one another / each other.(他们坐在那儿,互相都不说话。)
10、疑问代词：用来提出问题的代词称为疑问代词。
1、who、whom、whose、what、which、whoever、whatever、whichever 主要用于特殊
疑问句中,一般放在句首。口语中也常用who代替whom作宾语,但在介词后则只能
用whom。如：
Who(m) did you invite to your birthday party?(你都邀请了谁参加你的生日聚会的？)
/ What does she want to be when she grows up?(她长大了想干什么？)
162、who 和whom只能独立使用,其中who可以作句子的主语、表语或动词的宾语,whom
只能作谓语动词的宾语；而what、which、whose等既可以独立使用作主语、表语
和宾语,也可以与名词构成疑问短语。如： Who is that man?(那男的是谁？) / What
colour are their hats?(他们的帽子是什么颜色？) / Which car was made in
Germany?(哪辆车是德国造的？)(被动句)
注意这个提问：The man in the car is my father.(车里的男人是我父亲)
→Which man is your father?(哪个男人是你的父亲？)
3、which 除了可以询问指代的情况之外,还可以针对说明人物的时间、地点、岁数、颜
色、大小、状况等进行提问。如：People there live a very sad life.(那里的人生活凄
惨) →Which people live a sad life? (哪些人生活凄惨？)/ --Which hotel have you
booked for your holiday?(为了度假你预订了哪家旅馆？)—The biggest one in
Haikou.(海口最大的那家旅馆)
4、疑问代词不分单复数,视它所替代的人或事物决定单复数,但是通常用单数；如果修饰
名词,则以名词的单复数为准。如：Who is (are) in that playhouse?(谁在游戏房里？)
/ What is that? (那是什么？)/ What are those? (那些是什么？) / What colours do they
have?(它们有哪些颜色？)
第四章 数词
1、分类：数词有基数词和序数词两种。英语的数词可以作句子的主语、宾语、表语和定语。
2、基数词：表示数目的词叫基数词。
1、 英语中常用的基数词有：
1 one
2 two 20 twenty
3 three 13 thirteen 30 thirty 23 twenty-three
4 four 14 fourteen 40 forty
5 five 15 fifteen 50 fifty 35 thirty-five
6 six 16 sixteen 60 sixty
7 seven 17 seventeen 70 seventy
8 eight 18 eighteen 80 eighty
9 nine 19 nineteen 90 ninety
10 ten 100 one(a) hundred
11 eleven 101 one hundred and one
12 twelve
1000→one(a) thousand,10000 → ten thousand,100000 → one hundred
thousand ,1000000→one million,10000000→ten million, 100000000→one hundred
million,
108→one hundred and eight, 146→one hundred and forty-six, 500→five hundred ,
1001→one thousand and one, 1813→one thousand eight hundred and thirteen.
2、[注]：(1)百位与十位之间要加and；十万位和万位,亿位和千万位之间通常也要加and。
(2)英语用千、百万等单位计数,大数字从右向左看, 每隔三位划一逗号,倒数第一
个逗号之前要用 thousand,倒数第二个逗号之前要用 million,倒数第三的逗号
之前要用billion表示。
(3) hundred、 thousand、 million作数词时,不用复数,前面可以加上one, two, …
等其它数词。用作名词时复数表示“成…上…”,后面必须要有 of,前面可以
加上some,many,several等词。如：five hundred(五百), hundreds of(成百上千
的), ten thousand(一万), thousands of(成千上万的), millions of(成百万的)
3、序数词：表示顺序的数词叫序数词。
171、 英语的序数词基本变法：
(1) 一般在基数词后加th,(2)-ve结尾的改为-fth,(3)-ty结尾的改为-tieth,(4)熟记特殊词。
2、序数词如下：
1st ※first 21st twenty-first
2nd ※ 20th twentieth 22nd twenty-second
3rd 13th thirteenth 30th thirtieth 23rd twenty-third
second
4th 14th fourteenth 40th fortieth
※third
5th 15th fifteenth 50th fiftieth 35th thirty-fifth
fourth
6th 16th sixteenth 60th sixtieth
fifth
7th 17th seventeent 70th seventieth
sixth
8th 18th h 80th eightieth
seventh
9th 19th eighteenth 90th ninetieth
eighth
10th nineteenth 100th one
ninth
11th undredth 101st one hundred and first
tenth
12th
eleventh
twelfth
1000th→one thousandth, 1000000th →one millionth., 第 703→the seven hundred
and third,
第5480→the five thousand four hundred and eightieth.
3、注：(1)两位以上的序数词仅个位数部分用序数词,其余部分仍用基数词。如：thirty-
sixth,
(2) 使用序数词时一般加定冠词the. 如：I’m in the third grade.
(3) 序数词作“几分之几”讲时,有复数形式。如：1/5→one fifth ; 2/3→ two thirds ;
4/7→ four sevenths ; 1/2→ a half ; 1/4→a quarter ; 3/4→ three quarters ; 50%
→ fifty hundredths ( fifty per cent).
4、数词的用法：
1、表示年份：2002: twenty thousand and two ; 1976 : nineteen seventy-six.
2、表示日期： 12月1日: Dec.1st或the first of December；2002年11月8日: Nov. 8th,
2002.
3、表示时刻： 5：15→ five fifteen或a quarter past five ; 8：30→ eight thirty或half past
eight ; 10：45→ ten forty-five或a quarter to eleven.
4、表示编号：Room 105→Room one 0 five; Bus No.13→Bus Number Thirteen; P.5→Page
Five; Tel.No.7658659→Telephone Number seven-six-five-eight-six-five-nine
5、小数的读法：5.7→ five point seven, 0.16 →zero point one six.
6、“半”的表达： 1/2→half, 半小时→half an hour, 1.5小时→one and a half hours或one
hour and a half.
7、序数词前面加 the 时,表示顺序,加 a/an 时表示“再一、又一”。如：The third lesson is
rather difficult.(第三课相当难)/ Shall we read the text a third time?(我们把课文读第三遍,好
吗？)
第五章
1、冠词分类及读法：
英语中冠词有不定冠词和定冠词两种,常放在名词的前面,用来限定名词的意义,起泛指
或特指的作用。定冠词 the 读法：单独念时读[Ti:],在句子中常发[Ti ](元音之前)或者
[T[](辅音之前)；
不定冠词a/an的读法：单独念时读 [ei ]/[An ]；在句子中常发 [[]/[[n]。
2、不定冠词a / an的用法：
不定冠词a / an用在单数名词的前面,a用在辅音开头的词前面; an用在元音开头的词的
前面。
18不定冠词的基本用法：
(1) 表示某一个人或东西,但不具体说明何人或何物。如：There is a dog lying on the
ground.(有一只狗躺在地上。)
(2) 表示某类人或事物,以区别于其他种类。如：A elephant is much stronger than a
man.(大象比人强壮多了。)(不能译为：一头大象比一个人强壮。)
(2) 表示某类人或事物中的任何一个。如：He is a teacher of English.(他是英语教师。)
(4) 表示“一”这个数量。如：There is a table and four chairs in that dining-room.(在那
个餐厅里有一张桌子和四把椅子。)
(5) 几个用不定冠词的习语：a bit(一点), a little(一点), a few(几个), a lot (许多), a kind
of(一种), a pair of(一副、一双), a number of(大量的), a piece of (一张、一片), half
an hour(半小时), have a good time(玩得开心), have a cold(感冒), make a noise(发出
嘈杂声), have/take a (rest等)(休息)一会儿,等等。
3、定冠词the的用法：定冠词the用在可数名词的单数或复数或不可数的名词前面。
定冠词的基本用法：
(1) 表示特指的人或事物。如：The man with a flower in his hand is Jack..(手上拿着一朵
花的男人是杰克)
(2) 指谈话双方都熟悉的人或事物。如：Look at the blackboard,Lily.(莉莉,请看黑板。)
(3) 复述前面提到过的人或事物。如：There is a man under the tree. The man is called
Robert.(树下有个人, 那个人叫罗伯特。)
(4) 表示世界上独一无二的事物。如：The earth turns around the sun.(地球绕太阳旋转。)
(5) 用在表示方位的名词前面。如：There will be strong wind to the south of the Yangtze
River.(长江以南地 区将会刮大风。)
(6) 在序数词和形容词最高级的前面。如：Who is the first one to go?(谁第一个去？) / Of
all the stars, the sun is the nearest to the earth.(在所有的恒星之中太阳离地球最近)
(7) 常用在乐器名称的前面。如：He began to play the violin at the age of 5.(五岁时他开始
拉小提琴)
(8) 用在江河、海洋、山脉等名称的前面。如：I have never been to the Himalaya
Mountains.(我从来没有去过喜马拉雅山)
(9) 用在含有普通名词的专有名词的前面。如：He is from the United States of America.(他
来自美利坚合众国)
(10)用在姓氏之前表示一家人。如：The Greens are going to Mount Emei next month.(下个
月格林一家要去峨眉山)
(11)same之前一般用the。如：Lucy and Lily look the same.(露西和莉莉看上去长得一样)
(12)几个用定冠词的习语：at the same time (与此同时),make the bed(铺床),in the end(最
后),all the time(一直),by the way(顺便说一下),on the way(在路上)等等。
4、一些不用冠词的情况：
(1) 专有名词和(第一次使用)一些不可数名词时前面通常不用。如：China is a very large
country.(中国是个大国) / Man needs air and water.(人类需要空气和水)
(2) 名词前已有指示、物主或不定代词作定语时不用。如：My pen is much more expensive
than yours.(我的钢笔比你的昂贵多了)
(3) 周名,月名或季节名前一般不用。如：He was born on Monday, February 18,1995.(他
出生在1995年二月十八日,星期一) / They usually plant trees on the hills in spring.(春
天他们通常在山上植树)
(4) (第一次使用)复数名词表示人或事物的类别时不用。如：Men are cleverer than
monkeys.(人比猴子聪明)
(5) 三餐饭前不用。如：We have breakfast at home and lunch at school.(我们在家吃早
饭,在校吃午饭)
(6) 节、假日前一般不用。如：On Children’s Day the boys often get presents from their
parents.(在儿童节,这些男孩经常得到父母的礼物)
(7) 球类名词前不用。如：The children play football on Saturday afternoons.(孩子们星
19期六下午踢足球)
(8) 城市的重要/主要建筑物名称前不用。如：They are now at People’s Cinema.(他们此
刻在人民电影院)
(9) 一些习惯用语中不用。如：⑴ at / to / from / out of / after / for school; ⑵ in / to / for
/ after class; ⑶in / to / out of / into bed; ⑷ after / at/ from / out of / to work; ⑸ at / to
sea; ⑹ in / from / down / to town; ⑺ at / from home; ⑻ at / for / to
breakfast/lunch/supper; ⑼ at night/noon/midnight; ⑽ on foot; ⑾ go to school/bed;
⑿ on top of; ⒀ in front of; ⒁ on show/display/duty/watch; ⒂ in / out of hospital;
⒃ at all; ⒄ on/in time; ⒅ at first/last/once; ⒆ in Chinese/English,etc.; ⒇ take care
of
第六章 形容词、副词
1、形容词：用来说明或修饰名词、代词的词称为形容词。
1、形容词的句法作用：作句子中名词的定语、句子的表语以及宾语补足语。
2、形容词在句子中的位置：
⑴作定语时放在名词的前面,且音节少的词放在音节多的词之前。如：a big yellow
wooden wheel(一个黄色的大木轮)
⑵作表语时放在连系动词之后。如：The price sounds reasonable.(这个价格听起来算
是合理)
⑶作宾语补足语时放在宾语之后。如：We must try our best to keep our environment
clean.(我们必须尽力保持我们的环境清洁)
⑷后置的情况：
①修饰复合不定代词时放在代词之后。如：Something serious has happened to
him.(他发生了严重的事故)
②与表示“长、宽、高、重、老、远离”的词连用时形容词后置。如：He’s 1.8 metres
tall.(他身高1.8米。)The moon is about 380,000 kilometres away from the earth.(月
球离地38万公里)
3、有关形容词的用法辨析：
⑴ whole与all：记住两个词序：① the whole + 名词； ②all (of) the + 名词。如：He
was busy the whole morning.(整个早晨他都很忙) / He can remember all the words he
learns.(他能记住学过的所有单词)
⑵ tall与high, short与low：指人的个子时用tall与short；指其他事物时一般用high
与low。如：He’s very tall/short.(他个子高/矮) / Tall trees are standing on both sides of
that avenue.(大道的两侧有高大的树木) / A few people live on high mountains.(少量的
人住在高山上)
⑶ real与 true：real 一般指东西的真假,译为“真的”；而 true则指事情或消息的可靠
性,译为“真实的”。如：This is a real diamond(钻石) and it’s very expensive.(这是货真
价实的钻石,非常贵) / --Is that true?—Yes. I heard it with my own ears.(那真实吗？ 是
的,我亲耳所听)
⑷ interested与interesting的区别：interesting指人或东西“有趣的”,作定语或表语,而
interested 则表示人对别的事物“感兴趣的”,只能作表语。如：The man is very
interesting and all the children like him. (这个人很有趣,孩子们都喜欢他)/ This book is
interesting and you can really enjoy yourself.(这本书很有趣,你会真正获得享受) / I am
interested in science.(我对自然科学感兴趣)
⑸ such 用法： such + a(n) + 名词(单数)(+that 从句)。如：I have never seen such a
foolish(愚蠢的) boy.(我从来没有见过这么蠢的男孩) / He had such a terrible accident
that he could never forget it.(他遭遇了这么可怕的事故,他永远也不会忘记)
⑹ good与well：表示“好”时,作定语或表语用good,作状语用well；表示“(身体)好”
20时用well.如：Doing sports is good for us.(进行运动对我们有益) / Study well and make
progress every day.(好好学习,天天向上) / --How are you?—I am very well.(你好吗？我
很好。)
⑺ nice与fine：的区别：nice表示令人愉快的,可以指东西、人物外表等；fine一般指
身体或天气好。如：Let’s go and share(分享) the nice cake.(我们去分享那块美味的蛋
糕吧) / She is a nice girl.(他是个漂亮的姑娘) / What a fine day!(多好的天气！) /He’s
fine recently(最近).(近来他身体不错)
⑻ too much与much too：too much表示“太多的”,修饰事物数量；much too表示“太
过,过分”,修饰形容词或副词。如：I am full because I have had too much rice.(我饱了,
因为我吃了太多的米饭) / That coat is much too dear.(那件大衣太贵了)
⑼ quick、fast与 soon：quick与fast基本同义,quick往往指反应速度快,fast往往指运
动速度快,而soon则表示时间上很快即将发生。如：After a quick breakfast, he hurried
to school leaving his bag at home.(匆匆地吃过早饭,他朝学校赶去,却把书包忘记在家)
/ A train is much faster than a bus.(火车比公共汽车快得多) / His father will be back to
China very soon.(他父亲很快就要返回中国)
⑽lonely 与 alone：lonely 是表示心理活动的形容词,意思是：“孤独的,寂寞的”,作定语
或表语；alone的意思是：“独自的,单独的”,指无人陪伴,仅作表语,(作为副词的alone
可作状语)。如：He lives alone but he doesn’t feel lonely.(他一人独住,但是并不感到孤
独)/ He is a lonely person. You can not easily get on well with him.(他是个孤独的人,你
要和他相处好实在不易)
⑾ other 与 else 的区别：两个词都可以作形容词,但是用法不同,other 放在名词前；else
修饰不定代词、疑问词、little、much,后置,另外,or else表示“否则”,是连词。如：The
other students are on the playground.(其他学生在操场上) / Who else can work out this
maths problem?(还有谁能解出着道数学题？) / This is nobody else’s money. It’s
mine.(这不是别的什么人的钱,是我的。) / Do you have anything else to say for
yourself?(你还有什么要为自己说的吗？
⑿ special与especial的区别：表示事件不同寻常、过分或特殊时,两个词可互换,但special
较为常用。另外,special还可以表示特别的目的。如： She pays (e)special attention to
clothes.(她非常注重着装) / These are special chairs for small children.(这些是专门给小
孩子的椅子)
⒀ gone、lost、missing的区别：gone表示“丢了,没了”,含一去不复返的意思,也可以表
示“死了”,作表语或宾补,不可以作定语；lost表示“丢失”,含难以找回的意思,可作
定语、表语或宾补；missing 表示“失踪了,不见了”,强调某人物不在原处,可作定语、
表语或宾补。如：My fever(高烧) is gone, but I still have a cough.(发烧消退了,但我仍
然咳嗽) / The parents found the lost child at last.(家长终于找到了迷路的孩子) / My
dictionary is missing.Who’s taken it away?(我的字典不见了,谁拿走了？) / For more
detailed information(详情) of the missing girls, please visit our website(网址).(如果想知
道失踪女孩们的详情,请访问我们的网站)
⒁ living、alive、live、lively的区别：四个词都来源于动词live“生活、居住”。
living 读[‘liviN]有三个意思：①“活着的、现存的”,作表语或定语,②“一模一样的、
逼真的”,③相当于lively,意思是“强烈的、活泼的”；
live读[laiv],指东西“活的”,可以替换为living；
alive读[[‘laiv]作表语,指人“活着的”,如果作定语,则放在名词的后面；
lively读[‘laivli]有三个意思：①有生气的、活泼的、快活的,②(色彩)鲜艳的,③生动的、
真实的。
例如：A living language should be learned orally(口头上).(活的语言应该从口头上学)(被
动句) / We have a living hope that you will succeed.(我们强烈地希望你能成功) / Is
she still alive?(她还活着吗？) / They are the happiest children alive.(他们是活着的
最开心的孩子) / This is a live fish.(这是条活鱼) / A live wire(电线) is dangerous.(有
电的电线是危险的) / She is as lively as a kitten(小猫).(她像小猫一样可爱) / He
gave a lively description of the football match.(他生动地描述了那场足球赛)
21⒂ sick与ill区别：sick和ill都表示“生病的”,但是,sick可以做定语、表语,而ill只能
做表语。如：He has been ill/sick for a long time and he is very weak now.(他病了很久,
现在非常虚弱) / Vets help treat sick pets and most of the pets’ owners like them.(兽医帮
助诊治患病的宠物,很受宠物主人们的喜爱)
⒃ the poor(穷人们) / the rich(富人们)等用法：“the+形容词”这一结构可以表示一类人
物,复数含义。如：We must try our best to help the poor.(我们应该尽力帮助穷人们) / The
rich never know how the poor are living.(有钱人哪知穷人怎么过日子)
2、副词：用来说明事情发生的时间、地点、原因、方式等含义或说明其它形容词或副词程
度的词叫做副词。
1、副词的分类：(见下表)
频度副 地点/方位副 方式副 疑问/连接副
时 间 副 词 程度副词 其他副词
词 词 词 词
today, tomorrow, once, here, there, very, too, well, how, too, also,
yesterday, now, twice, home, below, enough, hard, where, nor, so,
rather,
then, early, late, always, anywhere, alone, when, as, on,off,
quite,
once, soon, just, usually, above, outside, how, so, fast, why, either,
tonight, long, often, in, inside, out, much, just, together, whether yes, no,
already, yet, sometime back, up,
nearly, only suddenly, however, etc. not, neither
before, s, down,
ago, later, ever almost,
never, away, off, far, -ly结尾 关系副词 maybe,
since hardly,
as long as
after, whenever (seldom), near, nearby, 的副词 where, perhaps,
等,
first, someday, ever, wherever even, all, why, how certainly,
sometime, last, everywhere, a little, a bit when,
2、副词在句子中的位置以及作用：
⑴作状语：
① 时间副词：一般放在句首或句尾,注意,early、late、before、later、yet等一般放
在句尾,already、just 一般放在动词的前面。如：We will visit the Great Wall
tomorrow.(我们明天要去参观长城) / They have already been to the UK twice.(他
们去过英王国两次) / Soon the lost boy found his way back home.(不久迷路的孩
子找到了回家的路)
② 频度副词：一般放在 be 动词之后或者助动词与主要动词之间,但 sometimes、
often 等还可以放在句首或句尾,usually 可放在句首,once 可放在句尾,twice、
three times等一般放在句尾。如：Sometimes I get up early.(我有时起得早)/ The
workers usually have lunch at the factory.(工人们通常在厂里吃午饭) / Take this
medicine twice a day.(这种药一天吃两次)
③ 方式副词：一般放在行为动之后,suddenly可以放在句首、句尾或动词之前。如：
Old people can hardly walk as quickly as young people.(老年人几乎不可能走得
和年轻人一样快) / Suddenly he saw a light in the dark cave(山洞).(突然,在黑黢
黢的山洞里,他看见了一丝亮光)
④ 地点副词：一般放在句尾,但here、there还可放在句首。如：There you can see
thousands of bikes running in all directions(方向).(在那里,你可以看到成千上万
的自行车朝各个方向流动) / The frightened wolf ran away.(受到惊吓的狼逃开
了)/ He walked out quietly and turned back soon.(他悄悄地走了出去,很快又返回)
⑤ 程度副词：修饰动词时,放在动词之前；修饰形容词或副词时,放在形容词或副
词之前。但注意,enough总是放在被修饰的形容词或动词的后面；only位置比
较灵活,总是放在被修饰的词的前面。如：I nearly forgot all about it if he did not
22tell me again.(如果他不再次告诉我,我几乎把那事全忘了) / It was so strange that
I could hardly believe my ears.(它那么奇怪一直我都不能相信我的耳朵) / She got
to the station early enough to catch the first bus.(她早早地赶到车站赶上了首班
车)
⑥ 疑问副词：用于对句子的状语进行提问,位置总是在句首。如：When and where
were you born?(你何时何地出生？)/ Why did little Edison sit on some eggs?(小爱
迪生为什么要坐在鸡蛋上？)/ How do you do?(你好！)
⑦ 连接副词：用来引导主语从句、宾语从句和表语从句,在从句中作状语。How I
am going to kill the cat is still a question.(我打算怎样杀死那只猫还是个问题)/
That is why everyone is afraid of the tiger.(那就是人人都害怕老虎的原因) / He
wondered how he could do it the next day.(他不知道第二天怎样做那事)
⑧ 关系副词：用来引导定语从句,在从句中作状语。如：This is the place where Mr
Zhang once lived.(这就是张先生曾经住过的地方)/ Please tell me the way how
you have learned English so well.(请告诉我你的英语是怎样学得这么好的方法)
⑨ 其它副词：too“也”,用在句尾；also放在动词前；either “也不”,放在句尾；nor
“也不”,放在句首；so“如此,这样”,放在形容词、副词前；on/off“开/关”放
在动词之后；not 放在 be 之后、助动词之后、不定式或动名词之前；
maybe/perhaps放在句首；certainly放在句首或动词之前。如：He went to the
Palace Museum and I went there,too.(他去了故宫博物院,我也去了) / Maybe your
ticket is in your inside pocket.(也许你的票就在你的里边衣袋里) / --Tom doesn’t
have a computer. –Nor do I.(汤姆没有计算机,我也没有。)
(2)作表语：地点副词一般可以作表语,放在be等连系动词之后,说明人物所处的位置。
如：I’m very sorry he isn’t in at the moment.(很抱歉,他此刻不在家)/ I have been
away from my hometown for nearly 20 years.(我离开家乡有将近20年了) / Jim
is over there.(吉姆就在那边)
(3)作定语：时间副词(如now、then)以及许多地点副词都可以作名词的定语,放在名词
的后面。如：People now often have their festival dinners at restaurants.(现在的
人们经常在餐馆里吃节日晚宴) / Women there were living a terrible life in the
1920s.(在二十世纪20年代那儿的女人过着可怕的日子)
(4)作宾语补足语：地点副词一般可以作宾语补足语。如：Put your dirty socks away,
Jim! They are giving out bad smell!(吉姆,把你的脏袜子拿开！它们在散发着臭
气。) / Father kept him in and doing his lessons.(父亲把他关在家里做作业)
[注意] “动词+副词”的宾语如果是代词,则该副词应该放在代词之后。如：He wrote
down the word.(他写下了那个词。)→He wrote it down.(他把它写了下来。)
3、有关副词的重要注释：
⑴ as…as…常构成一些词组：as soon as…(一旦…就…), as well as…(同样), as+形容
词/副词+as possible(尽可能……地)。如：Please ring me up as soon as you get to
Beijing.(请你一到北京就给我写信。)/ Miss Gao hurried to the school gate as quickly
as possible.(高小姐尽快地赶到了校门口。)
[注释] “as long / much as + 名词”可以表示“长达/多达…”的含义。如：The house
costs as much as five hundred thousand yuan.(那幢房子花费高达50万元。)/ They
stayed in the cave(山洞)as long as two weeks.(他们呆在山洞里长达两周。)
⑵ later、after、ago、before的用法：①“一段时间+later/ago”分别表示“(多久)以
后/以前”,主要用于过去时态。②“after/before+某个时刻”分别表示“在某时刻之
后/之前”,此时两个词是介词。③ago与before：ago只能用于过去时,before用于完
成时。如：He had an accident a week ago.(一周前出了一个事故)/ Some years later,
the boy became a very famous singer.(数年后这个男孩成了著名的歌唱家)/ Have you
been there before?(你从前到过那儿吗？)/ After a few years he gave up smoking.(过了
几年他戒了烟。)
⑶ above、below、over、under的用法：在上下方用above和below,在高低处用over
和under.如：The stars are high above in the sky.(星星高挂在空中) / A plane flew over
23quickly.(一架飞机从头顶飞过。)
当above、below、over、under是介词性质时,意义相似。
⑷ too、also、either、nor的用法：too(“也”)用于肯定句和疑问句的末尾,且用逗号
隔开；also(“也”)用于肯定句句子谓语动词之前；either(“也”)用于否定句末尾,
也用逗号隔开；nor(“也不”)用于倒装句句首；如：Are you American,too?(你也是
美国人吗？)/ He is not happy and I am not happy, either.(他不愉快,我也不。) / He
didn’t watch the football game. Nor did I.(他没有看足球赛,我也没有。)/ You can also
find the market is very good.(你还可以发觉那个市场很好。)
⑸ enough、too、so、very、quite、very much的用法： enough (“足够,十分”)放在形
容词或副词之后；too(“太”)、very(“非常”)、quite(“相当”)、so(“如此地”)
等放在形容词或副词之前,very much“( 非常”)放在动词之后。如：It’s too/so/very/quite
expensive.(它太贵/那么贵/非常贵/相当贵。)/ I don’t like sweets very much.(我不很喜
欢糖果)
[注意] very与 much的区别：very修饰形容词、副词的原级和现在分词形容词,much
修饰形容词和副词的比较级；much还可以修饰疑问句和否定句中的动词,very不可
以。如：He is very stupid.(他很笨)/ The film was very moving and everyone swept.(电
影非常动人,大家都哭了)/ You must work much harder or you will fail to enter the good
school.(你得学习更努力,不然你考不进那所好学校)/ I don’t like him much.(我不太
喜欢他)
⑹ sometimes、 sometime、 some times 、some time的用法：sometimes(有时)用于一
般现在时、 sometime(在将来某时)用于将来时、 some times(数次)表示次数、some
time(一些时间)表示一段时间。如：Sometimes they go hiking in the mountains.(他们
有时徒步旅行到山里去)/ I will stay here some time.(我会在这儿呆些时候的。)/ I will
meet your father sometime.(我什么时候要见见你的父亲。)
⑺ how、what用于感叹句的用法：对句子中的形容词或副词感叹时用how,对人或事
物(可能含有形容词作修饰语)进行感叹用what. 如：What a fine day (it is) today!(今
天天气真好！) / How difficult (the problem is)!((问题)真难呀！)
⑻ already、yet 的用法：在完成时中,already 一般用于肯定句,yet 一般用于否定句和
疑问句。如：Have you done it already?(你已经做好了？) / I have not had my breakfast
yet.(我还没有吃早饭呢。)
⑼ hard与hardly的用法：hard作为副词意思是：“努力地,猛烈地”,hardly是否定词,
意思是：“几乎不”,一般与情态动词can/could连用。如：They study English very
hard.(他们英语学得很刻苦)/ You can hardly see a person spit in a public place.(在公
共场所你几乎看不到一个人随地吐痰)
⑽ like...very much、like...better(=prefer)、like...best 的用法：三个短语分别表示“非
常喜欢”、“更喜欢”、“最喜欢”。如：I like baseball very much.(我非常喜欢棒球)/ Do
you like butter better than cheese?( / They like hamburgers best.
⑾“quite/what+a+形容词+名词”的用法：记住：①quite/such/what...+a+形容词+名词;
②too/so/how+形容词+a+名词;③rather+a+形容词+名词 = a+ rather+形容词+名词。
如：I have never seen such a strange guy(家伙).(我从未见过这样奇怪的家伙) / It is
quite a nice day for a walk.(这真是散步的好日子)
⑿ how 的几个短语：how often“多常,每隔多久”,用于一般时态,对表示频度的词语
进行提问； how soon“多久以后”,用于将来时态； how long“多久”,用于过去时、
完成时或其他时态； how many times“多少次”,用于过去时或完成时,对总计次数
进行提问； how much“多么,多少”,对程度进行提问,也可以对数量(不可数)或金钱
进行提问。如：How long have you been like this?(你这样已经多久了？)/ How often
does he wash his face?(他每隔多久洗一次脸？)
⒀ much、more与most的用法：这三个词除了是形容词作名词的修饰语之外,还是程
度副词,much表示“很”,修饰原级形/副,more表示“更”用来构成多音节形/副的比
较级,most 表示“最”用来构成多音节形/副的最高级。此外,much 也可以修饰比较
级形/副。如：This park is much more beautiful than that one.(这个公园比那个漂亮
24多了)/ It is the most instructive film I have ever seen.(这是我看过的最有教育意义的
电影)
⒁ no more、no longer、not...any more、no...any longer的用法：表示时间,可以用no
longer、not...ny more、no...any longer,而且no longer只能放在谓语动词之前；表示
程度,可以用no more、not...any more.如：He no longer lived there.(他不再住在那里)
/ Tom wanted no more cakes.(他不想再要蛋糕) / He didn’ t smoke any more/longer.(他
不再抽烟)
⒂ 被动语态中,方式副词一般放在 be 与谓语动词之间。如： The runner was badly
hurt.(赛跑运动员受了重伤) / English is widely spoken in the world today.(如今世界上
英语说得很广泛)
⒃ too...to...与 so...that...的问题：副词 too/so 后面跟形容词或副词,to 后面跟动词,that
后面跟从句。Too...to... (“太.……以致不……”)是否定的结构,用于简单句；
so...that...(“如此…以致…”)是肯定结构,用于复合句。如：The child is too young to
join the army.(这孩子年龄太小还不能参军)/ He is so strong that he can lift the heavy
box.(他这么强壮,搬得动那个重箱子。)
⒄ 既是形容词也是副词的单词有：early, late, long, last, next, first, near, enough, much,
all, hard, alone, fast, slow, high, low, straight等等。如：It was a long holiday.(那是个
长假)/ He stayed there very long.(他在那儿呆了好久)/ Think hard then you will find a
way.(好好想你就会找到办法)/ He is a very hard(难对付的) person.(他是个难玩的家
伙)
⒅ farther 与 further 的用法区别：表示地点、方向或距离时两个词同义,意思为“更
远、较远”,但是further还表示“更多、进一步、额外”等意思,此时不能换为farther.
如：They decided to go farther/further the next day.(他们决定第二天走得再远些)/ This
problem will be further discussed.(这个问题还要进一步讨论)/ Every one of them had
their further studies after they left college.(他们每个人大学毕业后继续进修)
⒆ rather与quite的用法区别：同very一样,两个词都表示形容词或副词的程度,quite
表示“不到最高程度但是比预料的好”,rather比quite更接近very的含义,含有令人
惊讶的意思。见下图对“nice”程度的描绘：
not nice (fairly) nice quite nice rather nice
very nice
如：It’s quite a nice film.(这是部好片子)。(可能意味着不是一部最好的电影) / It’s
rather a nice film.(这是部很不错的电影。)(意味着比大多数电影都好)
[注意]注意quite与rather后面的次序词序。
⒇ maybe、possibly、perhaps的区别：maybe“可能、也许”,比另外两个词更不正式、
更随便、可能性不大；possibly“可能地、或者、也许”,可能性较大,在否定句和疑
问句中表示“无论如何”；perhaps“可能”,较为常用而且正式,可能性也不大。如：
You could put it over there,maybe.(也许你可以把它放在那边) / I couldn’t possibly
have finished such a long book in such a short time.(我不可能在这么短的时间内完成
这么长的一本书)/ I thought perhaps it was the letter you have been expecting.(我以为
那也许就是你期盼的信件)
(21) most、mostly的区别：most作为形容词和名词时意思是“大多数的、大部分的”,
作为副词时意思为“最,十分、很”；mostly仅为副词,意思为“主要地、多半地、大
部分地”。如：I was at home most of the time when I was free.(我有空时大部分时间
都在家)Most children are naughty.(大部分的孩子都淘气)/ This is the most exciting
part of the film.(这是电影中最令人兴奋的部分)/She is mostly out on Sundays.(星期
天她一般不在家)
(22) (be) worth、(be) worthy of的区别：worth一般被看作是介词,后面接名词或者动名
词,用主动表示被动含义,还可以用副词well修饰；worthy of表示“值得的、配得上
的”,后面跟动名词的被动形式。如：What is worth doing at all is worth doing well(凡
是值得做的,就值得好好去做). / The house is worth ￥300,000.(房子价值 30 万元)/
25This book is well worth reading several times.(这本书值得好好读几遍)/ It is a thing
worthy of being seen.(这是一个值得看的东西)
(23)almost、nearly的区别：两个词意思相近,都表示“几乎、将近”,大多数情况下可以
互换,与否定词连用时用almost不用nearly. almost no 相当于hardly any(几乎没有)。
如：He had done almost nothing today.(他今天几乎没有干什么) / We are almost/nearly
there.(我们几乎就到那里了)/ Almost nobody/Hardly anybody understood his words.(几
乎没有人懂他的话)
(24) a bit与a little的区别：这两个名词短语经常当作副词使用,修饰形容词或副词的原
级或比较级,可以互换,语气比 rather 弱。如：This digital camera is a bit(a little)
expensive.(这台数码相机有点贵)/ It is a little(a bit) colder than yesterday.(今天比昨
天冷了点)
另外,a little可以直接加不可数名词,a bit 则采用“a bit + of +名词(不可数或可数名
词复数)”的形式。如：I have got a bit of a cold.(我有点感冒)/ Go and get a little water
for me, please.(请你去给我搞点水来)
[注意] not a bit(=not at all)意为“根本不”,而 not a little则意为“非常,不是一点”。
3、形容词、 副词的原级、比较级和最高级
1、分类：形容词和副词有原级、比较级和最高级三级。
原级变为比较级和最高级有规则变化和不规则变化两种。
2、规则变化:
(1)单音节和部分双音节形容词和副词,在原级的后面加上er,est构成比较级和最高级。
a)直接加er,est ：
b)以重读闭音节结尾的,要双写最后一个辅音字母,后加er,est：
c)以辅音字母+y结尾的,先把y改为i再加上er,est：
(2)两个音节或两个以上的音节的,在原级前加more / most.
3、不规则变化:
原级 比较级 最高级
good好的
better更好的 best最好的
well好；(身体)好的,
bad,badly糟糕的,糟糕地 worse 更糟糕的,更糟糕地； worst 最糟糕的,最糟糕地；
ill(身体)不舒服的 (身体)更不舒服的 (身体)最不舒服的
many许多的(可数)
more更多的；更 most最多的；最
much许多的(不可数)；非常
little少的 less更少的 least最少的
farther更远的；更远地 farthest最远的；最远地
far远的；远地
further进一步的(地) furthest最深刻的(地)
4、形容词和副词的原级、比较级和最高级的用法：
(1)讲述某人/物自身的情况时,用原级。基本句型是：
主语(sb./sth) + 谓语动词 + (very/too/so/quite/rather…) + 形容词/副词原级 +….
如：He is very old now.(他现在很老了) / They ran quite fast.(它们跑得相当快) / The
weather looks rather bad.(天气看上去相当糟) / I am so happy!(我是如此的快乐)
☆表示两者之间没有差别时,使用句型：
主语(第一个人物) + 谓语动词 + as + 形容词/副词原级 + as + 第二个人物 +….
如：He is as excited as his younger sister.(他和他妹妹一样兴奋)/ Lily rode her bike
as slowly as an old lady.(莉莉骑车像老太太一样慢)/ They picked as many apples as
the farmers (did).(他们摘的苹果和农民一样多)
☆表示第一个人比不上第二个人时,使用句型：
主语(第一个人物) + 谓语动词(否定式) + as / so + 形容词/副词原级 + as + 第
二个人物+….
26如：He is not so / as excited as his younger sister.(他没他妹妹那么兴奋) / Lily did
not ride her bike so / as slowly as an old lady. (莉莉骑车不像老太太那样慢) /
They didn’t pick so / as many apples as the farmers (did). (他们摘的苹果不如
农民多)
(2) 讲述两者有差异,第一个人物超过第二个人物时,用比较级。基本句型：
主语(‘A’)+谓语动词+(much/a little/even/still)+形容词/副词比较级+than+第二
个人物(‘B’)+….
如：A modern train is much faster than a car.(现代的火车比轿车快多了) / This book
didn’t cost me more than that one.(这本书花费我的钱不比那本多)
讲述两者有差异,第一个人物不及第二个人物时,用比较级。句型是：
主语(‘A’) + 谓语动词 + less+ (多音节形/副)比较级 + than + 第二个人物(‘B’)
+….
如：I think English is less difficult than maths.(我认为英语不比数学难)/ Do you
think it less important to learn a foreign language?(你认为学外语不那么重要吗？)
(3)讲述某人/物是一群之中最突出的一个时,用最高级。句型是：
主语(sb./sth) + 谓语动词 +(the) +形容词/副词最高级 +in / of ….
如：The Changjiang River is the longest in China.(长江是中国最长的河流) / He
jumped (the) highest of the three (boys).(三个男生中他跳得最高)
4、关于比较等级的重要注释：
1、以上六个句型中,如果动词是及物或不及物动词,则后面用副词；如果后面是连系动词,
则后面用形容词。如：This car is the fastest of the four.(形容词)(这辆汽车是四辆之中最
快的)/ This car runs (the) fastest of the four.(副词)(这辆汽车是四辆之中跑得最快的)
2、“比较级+and+比较级”表示“越来越……”。如：The weather is getting warmer and
warmer.(天越来越温暖了)
3、“the+比较级…,the+比较级…”表示“越…就越…”。如：The more trees we plant,the better
it will be.(我们栽的树越多,情况就会越好)/ The harder you try,the greater your progress
is.(你越是努力,进步就越大)
4、一般的形容词或副词的比较级前面可以加much/a little/even/still,而表示数量的more之
前还可以加some/ any/ no/ one/ two/ many/ several/ a lot等词。如：It is much colder today
than yesterday.(今天比昨天冷多了)/ Would you like some more coffee?(你还要些咖啡
吗？)/He did not eat any more.(他没有再吃)
5、more than / less than分别可以理解为“多于/少于”,相当于副词,more than=over; less
than=under.如：I lived in New York for more than four months.(我在纽约生活了四个多
月)
6、“one of the +最高级+名词(复数)”整个短语为单数含义,谓语要用单数形式。如：One of
the oldest houses has been burnt in a fire.(最古老的一幢房子在一场大火中被烧毁了)
7、“Which / Who+动词+形/副,□,□or□?”句型中,如果有两个选项,形/副用比较级,如果有
三个选项,形/副用最高级。如：Who has more books, Lin Tao or Han Mei?(林涛和韩梅谁
的书最多？)/ Which is the heaviest,a pig,a horse or an elephant?(猪、马、象哪个最重？)
8、上下文中含有 both/either/neither/two/twins 等表示两个事物的词时,用比较级,而且往往
还要加the；含有all/none/no one/ every 等表示三个或三个以上事物时,用最高级。如：
--Do you like the smaller one?—Neither.(小一点的那个你喜欢吗？一个都不喜欢)/ --Which
do you like best? –All of them!(你最喜欢哪个？全部。)
第七章 介词
1、介词的主要用法：
介词是一种虚词,不能独立使用。介词之后一般有名词或代词(宾格)或相当于名词的其
．．
他词类、短语或从句作它的宾语,即构成介词短语。有些介词是由两个以上的词构成
27的短语介词,如：out of(从…中出来), because of(因为), away from(距离…), on top
of(在…顶上), ever since(自从…), next to(在…隔壁), according to(根据…), in front
of(在…前方)等。
2、介词的分类表： (见下表)
地点(位置、范围)介词：above 在…前, about 在…附近, across在…对面, after 在…后面,
against 倚着..., along 在…近旁, among 在…中间, around 在…周围, round 在….周围, at
在…处, before在...前, behind在...后, below低于..., beside在...旁边, between在...之间, by
在...旁, down在...下面, from来自..., in在...里面, inside在...里面, near靠近..., of在...之中,
on在...上面, out of在...之外, outside在....外面, over在....上方, under在...下方, up在...上
面, on top of在...顶部, in front of在...前, close to靠近..., in the middle of在...的中间,
at the end of在...的末端,等等。
方向(目标趋向)介词：across横越..., against对抗..., along沿着..., around绕着..., round环
绕..., at 朝着..., behind 向…后面, etween…and…从…到...,by 路过/通过..., down 向…下,
for向..., from从/离..., in进入..., into进入..., inside到...里面, near接近..., off脱离/除..., on
向...上, out of向...外, outside向....外, over跨过..., past经过/超过..., through穿过..., to向/
朝..., towards朝着..., on to到...上面, onto到...上面, up向...上, away from远离...
时间介词：about 大约..., after 在…以后, at 在… (时刻), before 在…以前, by 到…为止,
during在…期间, for有…(之久), from从…(时)起, in在(上/下午);在(多久)以后, on在(某
日), past过了…(时), since自从…(至今), through 贯穿…(期间), till直到…时, until直到…
时, to到(下一时刻), ever since从那时起至今,at the beginning of在...开始时 ,at the end of
在...末 , in the middle of在...当中 ,at the time of在...时
方式介词：as作为/当作..., by用/由/乘坐/被..., in用…(语言), like与…一样, on骑(车)/
徒(步),通过(收音机/电视机), over 通过(收音机), through 通过..., with 用(材料),用(手/脚/
耳/眼), without没有…
涉及介词: about关于..., except除了…, besides除了…还... for对于/就…而言, in在…(方
面), of…的,有关..., on关于/有关..., to对…而言, towards针对..., with就…而言
其它介词:
【目的介词】 for为了..., from防止…, to为了…
【原因介词】 for因为..., with由于…, because of因为...
【比较介词】 as与…一样,like象…一样,than比...,to与…相比, unlike与…不同
【伴随/状态介词】 against和…一起(比赛),at在(上班/休息/上学/家,etc.),in穿着…(衣
服/颜色),into 变成...,on 在(值日), with 与…一起,有/带着/长着..., without 没有/无/
不与…一起
3、介词短语的句法作用：
介词短语相当于一个形容词或副词,可用作状语、定语和表语。如：The man came .(状)(那个人走下楼来)/The woman is from the
countryside.(定)(头上戴花的妇女来自乡下)/The teacher is now with the pupils.(表)(老师
现在和学生在一起)
4、介词短语在句子中的位置：
介词短语做状语时,如果表示时间/地点,可以放在句首或句尾,如果表示方向/方式/伴随/涉
及/原因/目的/比较,一般放在句尾； 介词短语作表语时放在连系动词之后；介词短语作
定语时,只能放在被修饰的名词之后。如：He wanted to find a good job in Shanghai the
next year.(状语)(他想来年在上海找份好工作)/ They searched the room for the thief.(他们
在房间里搜索小偷) / The letters are for you.(表语)(信是给你的)/ Have you seen a cat with
a black head and four white legs?(定语)(你看见一只黑头白腿的猫了吗？)
5、重要注释：
⑴ this / that / these / those / last / next / a / every / each等词构成的时间短语,前面不用任
何介词。如：Every year travellers from abroad come to visit Pingyao.(每年都有国外
的游客来游览平窑镇)/ He had a bad cold that week.(那个星期他患重感冒)
⑵ for有时用来引出动词不定式的逻辑主语,常翻译成“对于…而言”。如：It’s too hard
28for me to finish the work in only one hour.(让我在区区一个小时内完成这项工作太
难了)/ The house is big enough for 10 men to live in.(房子够大的可以容10个人住)
⑶ of有时用来表示后面的人物正好是前面的表语的逻辑主语。如：It’s very nice/kind of
you to do so.(你这么做真是太好了)
⑷ 介词有时会与它的宾语分离,而且宾语前置。
① 当宾语是疑问词时。Who are you talking about?(你们在谈论谁？)
② 宾语在从句中当连接词时。He has a younger brother who he must take good care
of.(他有 一个需要他照顾的小弟。) / Do you know who our teacher is talking with
over there?(你知道我们的老师在那边和什么人谈话吗？)
③ 动词不定式作定语且该动词为不及物动词,后面有介词。I finally found a chair to sit
on.(我 最终找到了一张椅子坐。)
(5) 记住一些固定词组：arrive at/in(到达…),on foot(步行),not…at all(根本不),to the north
of(在…以北),in the east of(在…的东部),in the night(在夜间),at night(在晚上),be afraid
of(害怕…),be full of(充满/ 装满….),be filled with(充满/ 装满….),be good/bad for(对…
有益/有害),be made of(由…做成),be made from(由…制造),play with(玩耍……),look out
of(朝…外面看),at the end of(在…末梢/结束时),by the end of(不迟于…/到…末为
止),with the help of 或 with one’s help(在…的帮助下),look after(照料…),look for(寻
找…),on a bike(=by bike)骑车, help sb. with(帮某人做…),get on (well) with(与某人相处
[融洽]),等等。
6、某些介词的用法辨析：
⑴ 时间或地点介词in、on、at的用法区别：表示时间时, in表示在一段时间里(在将来时
句子中则表示在一段时间之后), on表示在具体的某一天或者某天的上下午等, at表示
在某个时刻或者瞬间； 表示地点时, in表示在某个范围之内, on表示在某个平面上
或与一个面相接触,at 则表示在某个具体的场所或地点。如：He was born on the
morning of May 10th.(他出生于五月十日的早晨)/ I usually get up at 7：00 in the
morning.(我通常在早上的七点钟起床) / His glasses are right on his nose.(他的眼镜就
架在他的鼻子上)/ He is at the cinema at the moment.(此刻他正在电影院)
⑵ after与in表示时间的用法区别：“after+(具体时刻/从句)”表示“在…时刻之后”常用
于一般时态；“in+(一段时间)”表示“在(多久)之后”,常用于将来时态。如：He said
that he would be here after 6：00.(他说他六点钟之后会来这儿)/ My father is coming
back from England in about a month.(我父亲大约一个月以后从英国回来)
⑶ since与for表示时间的用法区别：“since+(具体时刻/that-从句)”表示“自从…起一直
到现在”,“for +(一段斶间)”表示“总共有…之久”,都常用于完成时态；如：Uncle
Li has worked in this factory since 1970.(李叔叔自从1970年起就在这家工厂工作了)/
Uncle Li has worked in this factory for over 30 years. (李叔叔在这家工厂已经工作了30
多年)
⑷ by、in与with表示方式的用法区别：都可以表示“工具、手段”,但是by主要表示“乘
坐”某个交通工具或“以……方式”,在被动句中可以表示动作的执行者；in表示“使
用”某种语言/文字,with表示“使用”某个具体的工具、手段。如：We see with our eyes
and walk with our feet.(我们用眼睛看东西,用双脚走路)/ Please write that article(文章)
in English.(请你用英语写那篇文章)/ Let’s go to the zoo by taxi.(我们打的去动物园吧。)/
It was written by Lao She.(那是老舍写的)
⑸ about与on的用法区别：都可以表示“有关…”,但是about的意义比较广,而on主要
表示“有关…(专题/课程)”。如：Tom is going to give a talk on the history of America.(汤
姆要作一个美国历史的报告)/ They are very excited talking about the coming field
trip.(他们兴致勃勃地谈论着即将来到的野外旅游)
⑹ through与across、over的用法区别： through指“穿过…(门洞/人群/树林)”； across
和over可以指“跨越…(街道/河流)”,可互换,但是表示“翻过…”时只能用over. 如：
Just then a rat (鼠)ran across the road.(就在那时一只老鼠跑过路面)/ There is a bridge
across/over the river.(河上有座桥)/ They climbed over the mountain and arrived there
ahead of time.(他们翻过大山提前到达了那里)/ The visitors went through a big gate into
29another park.(参观者们穿过一个大门来到另一个公园)
(7)as与like的区别：两个词都表示“像……”,但是as译为“作为……”,表示的是职业、
职务、作用等事实,而like译为“像……一样”,表示外表,不是事实。如：Let me speak
to you as a father.(我以父亲的身份和你讲话。)(说话者是听者的父亲) / Let me speak to
you like a father.(让我像一位父亲一样和你讲话)(说话者不是听者的父亲)
(8)at the end of、by the end of、to the end、in the end的用法区别：at the end of…既可以
表示时间也可以表示地点,译为“在…末；在…尽头”,常与过去时连用；by the end of…
只能表示时间,译为“在…前；到…为止”,常用于过去完成时； in the end与at last基
本等义,表示“终于、最后”,通常用于过去时；to the end译为“到…的终点为止”,前
面往往有表示运动或连续性的动词。如：By the end of last term we had learned 16 units
of Book III.(到上学期期末我们已经学习了第三册16个单元)/ At the end of the road
you can find a big white house with brown windows.(在路的尽头你能找到一幢有棕色
窗户的白房子)/ They left for Beijing at the end of last week.(上周末他们动身去了北京)/
In the end he succeeded in the final exams.(他最终在期末考试中考及格了)/ We should
go on with the work to the end.(我们应该把工作干到底)/ Follow this road to the end and
you will see a post office.(沿这条路走到底就能看见一家邮电局)
(9)for a moment、for the moment、in a moment、at the moment的区别：for a moment“一
会儿、片刻”(=for a while),常与持续性动词连用；for the moment“暂时、目前”,常
用于现在时；in a moment“一会儿、立即、马上”(=soon; in a few minutes),一般用于
将来时；at the moment“此刻,眼下”(=now),用于现在进行时。如：Please wait for a
moment.(请稍等)/ Let’s leave things as they are for the moment.(暂时就维持现状吧！) /
I’ll come back in a moment.(我过会儿回来)/ I am very busy at the moment.(眼下我很忙)
(10)but的问题：用介词but引出另一个动词时,要注意：如果前面有do,后面就用原形动词,
前面没有do时,后面的动词要加to。如：I could do nothing but wait.(我什么也做不了
只能等) / They had no choice(选择) but to fight.(他们没有选择只有战斗)
(11)in front of 与in the front of： in front of“在…的前面”, 与in the front of“在…的前
部”。如：A car was parking in front of the hall.(大厅跟前停着一辆汽车)/ In the front of
the hall stood a big desk.(大厅前部立着一个大讲台)
(12)except与besides的区别：except“除了”,表示排除掉某人物,即不包含；而besides“除
了”则表示包含,即“不仅……又……”。如：Everyone went to the Palace Museum except
Tom.(除了 Tom,大家都去了故宫博物院)(Tom 没有去故宫)/ Besides Chinese he also
studied many other subjects.(除了汉语之外,他还学其他许多功课)(“汉语”也是他学的
功课之一)
第八章 动词
1、动词的分类：
类
意 义 例 句
别
含有实在的意义,表示动作或状态,在She has some bananas. 她吃些香蕉。
句子中能独立作谓语。 They eat a lot of potatoes. 他们常吃土
实义动 豆。
词 I’m reading an English book now.
我现在正看一本英文
书。
本身有一定的词义,但不能独立作谓His father is a teacher.他父亲是教师。
连系动 语,必须和表语一起构成谓语。 Twins usually look the same.
词 双胞胎通常看起来一样。
The teacher became very angry. 老师变得
30很生气。
本身没有词义,不能独立作谓语,只能He doesn’t speak English. 他不说英语。
和主要动词一起构成谓语动词,用来We are playing basketball. 我们在打篮
助动词 表示否定、疑问、时态、语态或其它语球。
法形式,助动词自身有人称、单复数和Do you have a brother? 你有兄弟吗？
时态的变化。
本身有一定的意义,不能独立作谓语,You can keep the books for two weeks.
只能和主要动词一起构成谓语动词, 这些书你可以借两个星
情态动 表示说话人的语气和情态。情态动词 期。
词 没有人称和单复数的变化,有些情态May I smoke here? 我可以在这儿抽烟
动词有过去式。 吗？
We must go now. 我们现在得走了。
★重要注解：
(1) 关于实义动词：
① 英语的实义动词又可分为及物动词和不及物动词两大类：
后面必须跟宾语意义才完整的叫及物动词；本身意义完整,后面不需跟宾语的叫不及
物动词。
② 有些动词通常只作不及物动词。如：go,come,happen,lie,listen,rise,arrive,hall等。
有些动词通常用作及物动词。如：say, raise, lay, find, buy等。
③ 大多数动词可以兼作及物动词和不及物动词。如：study, sing等。
④ 有些动词作及物动词与作不及物动词时的意义有所不同。如：know, wash等。
⑤ 有些动词常和介词 、副词或其它词类一起构成固定词组,形成短语动词。如：
listen,reply,wait,look.
(2) 关于连系动词：
① 连系动词用来连接主语和表语,连系动词后面常为形容词。
② 常见的连系动词有：be、become、look、feel、sound、smell、taste、seem、turn、
grow、get、 go、fall、sit、stand、lie 等。
③ 有些连系动词来源于实义动词,意思也跟着变化：look(看→看起来)、feel(感觉、摸
→感到)、 smell(闻、嗅→闻起来)、taste(尝→尝起来)、turn(翻转、转动→变得)、
grow(生长→变得)、get(得到、到达→变得)、go(去→变得),所不同的是,作为实义动
词时,后面不能跟形容词。
[注释]
become、get、go、be、grow、turn的用法区别：become表示“变成”,比较正式,通常
不用将来时表示动作已经完成。get也表示动作已经完成,但是更加口语化,通常表示温
度、时间、岁数等变化。go表示“变得”,常见于某些短语中,后面常有形容词bad、
blind、hungry等。be表示“是、成为、当”,多用于将来时、祈使句或不定式中。grow
表示“变得”,常指逐渐的变化,表示身高、岁数的增长。turn表示“变得”,指变为与
原先不同的情况,通常指颜色等变化。如：I was caught in the rain and I became ill.(我
淋雨感冒了)/ He has got rich.(他变富了)/ He will be a scientist in the future.(将来他将
成为科学家)/ My little brother has grown much taller in the past year.(在过去的一年里
我的弟弟长得高多了)/ The sandwich has gone bad.(那块三明治已经变坏)/ Her face
turned red after her mother criticized(批评) her.(妈妈批评了他以后他的脸变红了)
(3) 关于助动词：
①常见的助动词有：用于进行时和被动语态的be (am, is, are ,was, were, been, being ) ;用
于完成时的have(has,had,having) ;用于将来时的shall (should) ; will (would)和用于一
般时的do(does,did) .
②助动词必须同主语的人称和数一致,也就是说因主语人称、数的不同而采用不同的形
式,其中有些助动词也可作情态动词。如：shall, will, should, would.
(4) 关于情态动词：
31①常见的情态动词有：can (could) ,may (might), must ,shall (should), will (would), dare
(dared) , need等,另外,have to、had better也当作情态动词使用。情态动词后面必须加
动词的原形。
②can 表示体力、脑力方面的能力或客观的可能性。口语中, 在询问或说明一件事可不
可以做时,常用“can”代替“may”。情态动词“can”的过去式是“could”,否定式是
“cannot”通常缩写成“can’t”“, could”的否定式是“could not”,通常缩写成“couldn’t”。
如：Can I help you?(要帮忙吗？)/ He can swim.(他会游泳)/ That can’t be Mr Li.(那不
可能是李先生)
③ may 表示允许、请求或可能性,用 may 提问时,肯定回答一般用 Certainly 或 Yes,you
may.;否定回答一般用can’t或mustn’t. 如：May I ask you a question?—Certainly.(可
以问你一个问题吗？当然可以)/ You may go now.(现在你可以走了)/ It may be in your
pocket.(它可能在你的衣袋里)
④ must表示“必须”、“一定”的意思。表示“必须”时否定形式是mustn’t；表示“一
定”时,否定形式是“can’t” 如：We must be very careful when we cross the road.(我们
过马路时一定要非常小心)/ It must be Jack.(那准是杰克)/ I haven’t seen Kate today. She
can’t be here.(我今天没有看到过凯特,她不可能在这里)
[注意]用must(必须)进行提问时,肯定回答用must,否定回答用needn’t；用must(一定)
进行提问时,肯定回答仍用 must,但是否定回答用 can’t.如：Must we clean the room
before we leave? –Yes,you must.或No,you needn’t.(我们走之前必须要打扫房间吗？是
的,必须打扫。/ 不,不需要。) / Must she be in the romm? –Yes,she must.或 No,she
can’t.(她一定在房间里吗？是的,一定。/ 不,不可能在。)
⑤ “have to”表示“不得不”、“必须”。We’ll have to leave now for it is very late at night.
have to的疑问形式是：助动词+…+have to,否定形式是：助动词+not+have to或者用
needn’t.如：Do you have to stay until 8 o’clock?(你得呆到8点钟吗？)/ You don’t have
to do so.(=You needn’t do so.)(你不用这么做)
⑥ shall 在问句中,可表示征求对方意见,与第一人称连用；在陈述句的第二、三人称的
主语后或表示“命令”、“警告”、“允许”等。如：Shall we go to the zoo this weekend?(我
们这个周末去动物园好吗？)/ He shall bring his own book next time.(他下次必须带自
己的书来)
⑦ should 可表示“劝告”、“建议”、“惊奇”等意思。We should speak to old people
politely.(我们应该礼貌地对老人讲话)
⑧ will表示“意愿”、“决心”等意思,一般与第二人称连用。如：Will you please close the
door for me?(请你替我把门关上好吗？)/ I will teach you a lesson.(我要教训你一顿)
⑨would表示过去的“意愿”、“决心”等。He would sit near the fire every time he returned
home.(每次他回到家中总要坐在火炉边)
would也可以表示现在的情况,表达说话人向对方提出的要求,语气比“will”婉转、客
气。在日常会话中,“我想要…”通常用“I would like to”或“I should(I’d) like
to”来表示。如：Would you like to have a rest at the moment?(你现在想要休息
一下吗？)
would还可以表示过去经常发生的事情。如：Every year parents would tell their children
about the boy who would save his people.(每一年父母们总是向孩子们讲述这个
将会拯救他的人民的男孩的事)
⑩ need表示“需要”,用于疑问句或否定句。“need”作实义动词时,在肯定、否定、疑
问句中都可以用。如：He needn’t do it in such a hurry.(他不需要如此匆忙地做这件事)/
He needs some help.(他需要一些帮助)/ He doesn’t need to bring his football socks
then.(那么他就无须带上足球袜了)
⑾ dare是“敢”的意思,用法几乎与“need”完全相同,即在疑问句和否定句中,可以作情
态动词,后面用不带“to”的动词不定式。在肯定句中和实义动词一样,后面的动词不
定式要带“to”。How dare you say I am a fool?(你竟敢说我是个傻瓜？)/ He didn’t dare
to touch the red button.(他不敢触碰那个红色的按钮)
⑿ ‘d better (do)(“最好是”)一般也当作情态动词使用,否定式是：’d better not (do). 如：
32You’d better sit here and say nothing.(你最好坐在这儿不讲话)/ You’d better not speak
because he is sleeping.(你最好不要讲话因为他正在睡觉)
2、动词词形变化一览表：
(1)规则动词变化表：
原形动词结尾情况 现在时单三人称 现 在 分 词 过去式和过去分词
一般情况 +s +ing +ed
规 s,x,ch,sh,o结尾 +es +ing +ed
则 辅音字母+y结尾 y→i,+es +ing y→i,+ed
变 重读闭音节一元一辅 +s 双写辅音字母,+ing 双写辅音字母,+ed
化 结尾
不发音的e结尾 +s 去掉e,+ing +d
ie结尾 +s ie→y,+ing +d
have→has；be→is (无) (见不规则动词变化
不 规 则 变 化
表)
注意：①在加ing或ed时动词如果以“r”结尾,尾音节又重读的动词,“r”应双写。
②s/es的读音规则：在清辅音后读[s]；在浊辅音后和元音后读[z]；在[ s ]、[ F]、[z]、
[tF]、[dV]后读[iz].
③ed的读音规则：在清辅音后读[t]；在浊辅音后和元音后读[d]；在[t]、[d]后读[id].
(2)不规则动词变化表：( 原形 → 过去式 → 过去分词)
be(am,is) was been lose lost lost
be(are) were been make made made
beat beat beaten may might
become became become mean meant meant
begin began begun meet met met
blow blew blown mistake mistook mistaken
break broke broken must must
bring brought brought pay paid paid
build built built put put put
buy bought bought read read Read
can could ride rode ridden
catch caught caught ring rang rung
choose chose chosen rise rose risen
come came come run ran run
cost cost cost say said said
cut cut cut see saw seen
dig dug dug sell sold sold
do did done send sent sent
draw drew drawn set set set
drink drank drunk shall should
drive drove driven shine shone shone
33eat ate eaten show showed shown
fall fell fallen shut shut shut
feel felt felt sing sang sung
find found found sink sank/sunk sunk/sunken
fly flew flown sit set set
forget forgot forgot/forgotten sleep slept slept
freeze froze frozen smell smelt smelt
get got got speak spoke spoken
give gave given spend spent spent
go went gone spill spilt spilt
grow grew grown spoil spoilt spoilt
hang hung/hanged hung/hanged stand stood stood
have(has) had had sweep swept swept
hear heard heard swim swam swum
hide hid hidden take took taken
hit hit hit teach taught taught
hold held held tell told told
hurt hurt hurt think thought thought
keep kept kept throw threw thrown
know knew known understand understood understood
lay laid laid wake woke/waked woken/waked
learn learnt/learned learnt/learned wear wore worn
leave left left will would
lend lent lent win won won
let let let write wrote witten
lie lay lain
3、be(“是/存在”)动词的各种时态变化：
一 般 现 在 时 一 般 将 来 时 现 在 完 成 时
I am…. (I等各人称) will be…. I have been….
You are.… I am You have been….
She/he/It has been….
He/She/It is…. He/She/It is going to
We/You/They have been….
We/You/They are…. be…
We/You/They are
一 般 过 去 时 过 去 将 来 时 过 去 完 成 时
I was…. (I等各人称) would be…. I had been….
You were.… I was You had been….
He/She/It was…. He/She/It was going to She/he/It had been….
We/You/They be… We/You/They had been….
were…. We/You/They were
注意：句型变化时,
否定句在am /is /are /will /have /has /was /were /had /would 后面加not,而且not都可
34以缩写为n’t (am后面not不可以缩写)；
疑问句将am /is /are /will /have /has /was /were /had /would 提前到句首。
谓语
4、其它 动词(主动语态)的时态变化一览表：
现在 现 在 完 成
一 般 现 在 时 现 在 进 行 时 一 般 将 来 时
时态 时
动词用原形(单am will + 动词原形 have +过去分
三加s / es) is +动词-ing am 词
谓语动
(问句和否定句are is +going to+动词原has
词构成
借用助词 do / 形
does) are
过去 过 去 完 成
一 般 过 去 时 过 去 进 行 时 过 去 将 来 时
时态 时
动词用过去式 was would + 动词原形 had +过去分
(问句和否定句 + 动 词 -was 词
谓语动
借用助词did) ing +going to+动词原
词构成
were 形
were
5、八种时态的具体用法：
(1) 一般现在时 表示现阶段经常或习惯发生的动作或存在的状态,或说明主
语的特征。
① 一般现在时句子中常有的时间状语：often,usually,sometimes,always,every (day
等), once/twice,a (week等), on (Sunday等),never,in the (morning等)。如：
They go to the Palace Museum once a year.(他们每年去一次故宫)/ They often
discuss business in the evening.(他们经常在晚上商谈生意)
② 表示客观真理、事实、人的技能或现在的状态时句子里一般不用时间状语。如：
The earth turns round the sun.(地球绕着太阳转)/ Light travels faster than
sound.(光传播比声音快)
③ 表示十分确定会发生(如安排好的事情)或按照时间表进行的事情,用一般现在可
以表达将来,句子中可以有将来时间。如：The train for Haikou leaves at 8：00
in the morning.(开往汉口的列车上午8点开车)
④ 在时间状语从句中(以when, after, before, while, until, as soon as等引导)和条件
状语从句中(以 if,unless 引导),用一般现在时代替一般将来时,句子可以有将来
时间。如：Please ring me up as soon as you arrive in Germany.(你一到德国就给
我打电话) / If it rains tomorrow,we will have to stay at home.(如果明天下雨我们
就只好呆在家)
⑤ 一般现在时用于倒装句中可以表示正在发生的动作,动词以come, go为主。如：
Here comes the bus. (车来了) / There goes the bell.(铃响了)。
⑥ 一般现在时常用于体育比赛的解说或寓言故事中。Now the midfield player
catches the ball and he keeps it.
⑦ 人的心理活动和感官动作一般用一般现在时而不用现在进行时表达,常见动词
有：like, love, hate, dislike, want, wish, hope, think(认为),understand, remember,
forget, mean, need, hear, feel, see. 如：I think it is going to snow.(我想天要下雪
了)/ I really hope you can enjoy your stay here.(我真的希望你愉快地呆在这儿)
(2) 一般过去时 表示过去某时发生的动作或状态,这种动作或状态可能是一次性,也可
能经常
35发生。
① 表示过去具体时刻发生的一次性动作时,时间状语有：at (eight) (yesterday
morning),(ten minutes) ago, when引导的时间状语从句。如：I got up at 6：00
this morning.(我是早上六点钟起床的)/ Little Tom broke the window at half past
nine this morning.(小汤姆今天早上九点半把窗子打破了)/ When he went into
the room,he saw a stranger talking with his father.(他走进房间时发现一个陌生
人正和他父亲谈话)
② 表示过去一段时间内不知何时发生的一次性动作时,时间状语有：yesterday, last
(year等), in (1998 等)。如：He came to our city in the year 2000.(他2000年来
到我们市)
③ 表示过去一个阶段中经常发生的事情时,时间状语有：last…, in…, from…to…,
for(10 years),often,usually, sometimes, always, never等。如：Mr Jackson usually
went to evening schools when he was young. / Every day he went to the rich man
and borrowed books from him.
④ 讲故事、对过去经历的回忆、双方都明白的过去事件等一般用过去时,而且经
常省略时间状语。如：I happened to meet Rose in the street.(我正好在街上遇到
露西)
(3) 一般将来时 表示将来某一时刻或经常发生的动作或状态。
①一般将来时的时间状语有：tomorrow,this (afternoon),next (year),one day,now,soon,
someday,sometime, in the future, when引导的从句等。
② 用 will 构成的将来时,表示动作与人的主观愿望无关。“shall”用于第一人称,
“will”
用于所有人称。如：I will graduate from this school soon.(我很快就要从这所中
学毕业了)/ You will stay alone after I leave.(我走了之后你就要一个人过了)
③ “am/is/are going to+动词原形”表示打算或准备要做的事情,或者主观判断即
将要发生的事情,而“am/is/are to +动词原形”表示安排或计划中的动作。如：
A man told them that the woman was to give birth to the special baby.(有一个人告
诉他们那个妇女就会生下那个特别的男孩)/ It’s going to rain soon.(天快要下雨
了)
④ 表示一个人临时决定要做某事,可以用will表达。如：I will go to the lab to get
some
chemicals(化学药剂). So please wait until I return.(我要到化学实验室去取些药
品,请等我回头)
⑤ 现在进行时、一般现在时也可以表示将来。(见相应时态)
⑥ shall和will 在口语的一些疑问句中相当于情态动词。Shall一般与第一人称连
用,will与第二人称连用。如：Shall we go to the zoo next Saturday?(我们下周六
去动物园好吗？)/ Will you please open the door for me?(替我把门打开好吗？)
⑦ “be to +动词原形”表示按照计划将要发生的事情。如：An angel came to tell her
that she was to have this special boy.
(4)现在进行时 现在进行时表示现在正在进行的动作或是现阶段正发生而此刻不一定
在进行的动作。
① 现在进行时由“助动词be (am is are ) +现在分词”构成。
② 现在进行时的时间状语有： now, this …, these…等,但经常不用。如：What are
you doing up in the tree?(你在树上干什么？)/ I am writing a long novel these
days.(我最近在写一本长篇小说)
③ 表示即将发生的动作,一般指近期安排好的事情。常见的动词有：come, go, stay,
leave, spend, do 等。如：I’m coming now.(我就来)/ What are you doing
tomorrow?(你明天干什么？)/ He is leaving soon.(他就要走了)
④ 表示频繁发生或反复进行的动作,常与always等频度副词连用,以表示赞扬、不
满或讨厌等感情色彩。如：He is always borrowing money from me and forgetting
36all about it some time later.(他老是向我借钱,过一些时候就忘得一干二净)
(5)过去进行时 过去进行时表示过去某一时刻或某阶段正在进行的动作。
① 过去进行时由“was(第一、三人称单数)或were(第二人称单数和各人称的复数)+
现在分词”构成。
② 过去进行时的时间状语有：then, at that time, this time yesterday, at (eight)
yesterday (morning),(a year) ago, 以及由when引出的时间状语从句。如：He
was cooking supper this time yesterday.(昨天这个时候他正在做晚饭)/ The little
girl was playing with her toy when I saw her.(我看到小女孩的时候她正在玩玩
具)
③ 用于宾语从句或时间状语从句中,表示与主句动作同时进行而且是延续时间较
长。句子中通常不用时间状语。如：She was it happen when she was walking
past.(她路过时看到事情的发生)/ They sang a lot of songs while they were
walking in the dark forest.(他们在黑暗的森林里走时唱了很多歌)
④ 也可以表示过去一个阶段频繁发生或反复进行的动作,常与always等频度副词
连用,以表示赞扬、不满或讨厌等感情色彩。如：He was always borrowing money
from me when he lived here.(他住在这里时老向我借钱)
(6)现在完成时 现在完成时表示一个发生在过去的、对现在仍有影响的动作,或表示开
始在过去,并且一直延续到现在,甚至还可能延续下去的动作。
①在完成时由“助动词have (has)+动词的过去分词”构成。
②表示发生在过去的对现在仍有影响的动作时,时间状语有：already, yet, just, once,
twice,ever, never,three times, before等。如：I have never seen such fine pictures
before. (我以前从来没有看过这么好的画)/ He has just gone to England.(他刚去英
国)
③表示在过去开始一直延续到现在(可能延续下去)的动作或状态时,时间状语有：
for (two years),since 1990, since (two weeks ago)和since引导的状语从句。如：I
have been away from my hometown for thirty years.(我离开家乡有30年了)/ Uncle
Wang has worked in the factory since it opened.(自从这家工厂开张,王叔叔一直在
那儿工作)
④口语中have got往往表示have(有)的意思。如：They have got thousands of books
in their library.(他们图书馆有上万本书)
⑤have been to与have gone to的区别：have gone to(“已经去了”)表示人不在这
里,have been to(“去过”)表示人在这里。如：--Where is Mr Li? –He has gone to
the UK.(李先生在哪里？他去了英国。)/ --Do you know something about Beijing?
–Yes,I have been to Beijing three times. (你知道北京的情况吗？是的,我去过那里
三次。)
⑥在完成时中,一个瞬间性动词(一次性动作)不能与表示一段时间的状语连用,此时
须将该瞬间动词改为延续性动词或状态动词。具体变化见下表：
瞬间性动词的完成时 延续性动词或状态动词的完成时
have (already) gone to… have been in / at … for (two years)
has come to… has been here since (1990)
(had) left… (had) been away from…
→
arrived… been in…
died been dead
begun been on
ended been over
37bought... had…
borrowed… kept…
joined… been in …
或者使用下面这个句型：
It is / has been + (多久)+ since + 主语(人)+谓语(过去时)+……+过去时间状
语
[注意] 在其它的时态中也存在类似问题,记住,关键是：瞬间动词不能和表达一段时间
的状语连用。如：How long may I keep the book?(这本书我能借多久？)(句子中keep
取代了borrow)
(7) 过去完成时 过去完成时表示过去某一时间或某一动作发生之前已经完成的动作。简
言之, 过去完成时所表示的时间是“过去的过去”。
①过去完成时由“助动词had+动词的过去分词”构成。
②过去完成时时间状语有：by (yesterday), by then, by the end of (last…)或者由
when,before等引出状语从句。有时句子中会有already, just, once, ever, never等词
语,也会有for… 或since…构成的时间状语。如：They had already finished cleaning
the classroom when their teacher came.(当老师来的时候他们已经打扫完了教室)/
The woman had left before he realized she was a cheat.(在他发觉那个妇女是个骗子
时她已经走掉了)
③过去完成时常用于宾语从句中、after引导的从句中,或者从句是before引导的主
句中。如：After I had put on my shoes and hat,I walked into the darkness.(我穿上
鞋子戴上帽子走进了黑暗之中)/ He said that he had never seen a kangaroo
before.(他说他以前从来没有见过袋鼠)
(8) 过去将来时 过去将来时表示在过去预计将要发生的动作或存在的状态。
①过去将来时由“助动词should(第一人称)或would(第二、三人称)+动词原形”构
成。在美国英语中,过去将来时的助动词一律用“would +动词原形”。
②过去将来时常由于宾语从句中,时间状语有：later, soon, the next (day).
③在时间状语从句和条件状语从句中不可以使用过去将来时,而应该使用一般过去
时。如：He promised that he would pay me a lot if I helped him with the project.(他
答应付给我许多钱如果我帮助他搞那个项目)/ Every time when he was free,he
would sit down and read some books.(每次只要他有空他就会坐下来看看书)
④表示纯粹的将来时用 would 或 should,表示打算或主观认为的事情用 was/were
going to (+动词原形)。如：She told me she would be 18 the next month.(她告诉我
她下个月就18岁了)/ She told me that she was going to have a walk with her pet
dog.(她告诉我她打算带她的宠物狗去散步)
⑤过去将来时还可以表示一个过去经常性的动作。如：When it rained in the day, he
would bring an umbrella with him.(白天下雨时他会随身带一把雨伞)
(9)现在完成进行时：现在完成进行时指一个从过去就开始一直延续到现在并由可能继续
下去的动作,它具有现在完成时和现在进行时双重特征,结构是：“have/has + been +
动词的现在分词”。如：I have been swimming in the cold water for about two hours.(我
已经在冰冷的水里游了将近两个小时)/ How long have you been waiting here?(你在
这里一直等了多久？)
6、被动语态：
(1)被动语态定义：被动语态是动词的一种特殊形式,用来说明主语与谓语动词之间的关
系。如果主语是 动作的执行者(即某人做某事),便叫主动语态；如果主语是动作的
承受者(即某事被做),便叫被动语态。主动与被动的区别不是词序的区别,而是主语与
谓语意义上的区别。在英语中只有及物动词和一些相当于及物动词的词组才有被动语
38态的形式。
(2)英语中被动语态由“助动词be +动词的过去分词”构成。助动词be有时态、人称和
数的变化。被动语态后的by短语有时可省去。具体结构见下表：
现在时态 一般现在时 现在进行时 一 般 将 来 时 现在完成时
am am will + be+p.p. have(has)
谓语动词 is +p.p. is +being+p.p. am +been+p.p.
构 成 are are is +going to+ be + p.p.
are
过去时态 一般过去时 过 去 进 行 时 过 去 将 来 时 过去完成时
was +p.p. was would +be+p.p. had +been+p.p.
谓语动词
were +being+p.p. was +going to+be+p.p.
构 成
were were
[注] p.p.表示过去分词。
(1) 被动语态的用法：
① 不知道谁是动作的执行者(即不知道谁做)时用被动语态,省略by短语。如：A man
was killed in the accident.(一个人死于事故)/ This window was broken yesterday.(这
扇窗子是昨天被打破的)
②不说或者众所周知是谁做时,用被动语态,省略by短语。如：Rice is also grown in
this place.(这个地方也种水稻)/ A railroad will be built here in three years.(三年之后
这里将要修建一条铁路)
③强调动作的承受者,句尾加by短语。如：It was written by Lu Xun.(它(书)是鲁迅
写的)/ A pet dog is never killed by its owner.(宠物狗是不会被主人宰杀的)
(2) 主动语态如何改写为被动语态：
主动句： 主语(人/物) + 谓语(及物动词) + 宾语(人/物) + 其他 + 状语
(动作的执行者) (各种时态形式) (动作的承受者)
被动句： 主语(人/物) + 谓语(及物动词) + by +人 / 物 + 其他 + 状语
(动作的承受者) (be +过去分词) (动作的执行者)
(3) 注意点：
①“动词+间接宾语+直接宾语”改为被动时,可以用间接宾语做被动句的主语。如：
His teacher gave him a dictionary.→He was given a dictionary by his teacher.(老师给
他一本字典→他得到老师一本字典)
也可以用直接宾语做被动句的主语,但是需用to或者for引出原句的间接宾语。如：
His teacher gave him a dictionary.→A dictionary was given to him by his teacher.(老
．．
师给他一本字典→一本字典由老师送给了他)/His father made him a kite.→A kite
was made for him by his father.(他的父亲给他做了一个风筝→一个风筝由他的父亲
．．．
做给了他)
②“动词+宾语+动词原形”改为被动时,动词原形前要加to.如：The boss made the poor
man work 12 hours a day.→The poor man was made to work 12 hours a day.(老板让
．．
39这个可怜的人一天工作12小时→这个可怜人被迫一天工作12小时)
③“动词+…+介词”改为被动时,介词一般在原位不动。如：The girl takes good care
of her little brother.→The girl’s little brother is taken good care of by her.(女孩照顾小
．． ．．
弟弟→女孩的小弟弟由她照顾着)
④“be+过去分词”未必表示被动语态,而可能是系表结构。如：
He is pleased / worried / tired /…….(系表)(他高兴/焦虑/疲劳……)
He was hit / knocked down / told / shot / …….(被动)(他被击中/撞倒/关照/射中……)
7、动词的非谓语形式：动词不做谓语时的固定形式。
(1)动词的非谓语形式包括动词不定式、动名词和分词三种形式；其中分词又包含现在分
词和过去分词两种形式。它们在句子中不能单独作谓语。
(2)动词不定式：
① 形式：动词不定式基本形式由“不定式记号 to+动词原形”构成。它的否定形式只
要在“to” 前面加上“not”。它的疑问形式是：“wh-疑问词+to+动词原形”。*它的
被动形式：“to be +过去分词”。*它的完成形式：“to have +过去分词”。
② 动词不定式具有名词、形容词和副词的特征,即可以在句子中作主语、宾语、定语、
状语、表语和宾语补足语。但不定式也保留动词的某些特征,即不定式后面可以跟
宾语、表语和状语。动词不定式加上相关成分就构成不定式短语。
③ 动词不定式可以放在谓语前句子作主语。但是通常将作主语的动词不定式或不定式
短语放在谓语后面,而在主语位置用“it”作形式主语(有时在不定式的前面还会用
for sb.表示不定式的逻辑主语)。如：To help animals is helping people.(帮助动物就
是帮助人)/ It is very difficult (for us) to learn Chinese well.((对于我们而言)学好汉语
是非常的困难)/ It took me half an hour to work out this problem.(解出这道题花了我
一个小时的时间)
④ 动词不定式可以作谓语动词(及物动词)的宾语。
[A] 及物动词+不定式一般形式：
+不定
式
谓语动词(vt.) [说 明]
(作宾
语)
want(想) / try(试图) / decide(决定) / (无)
would like(想要) / hope(希望) / love(喜
爱) / learn(学会) / afford(提供) / agree(同
意) / fail(失败、未能) / mean(意味着) /
prefer(宁愿) / wish(希望)
+ to (do)
help(帮助) to可以省略
begin(开始)/ start(开始)/hate(憎恨) 也可跟动名词,意义变化不
大
forget(忘记) / remember(记得)/ like(总 也可跟动名词,意义变化较
爱) 大
如：I would like to have a rest at the moment.(我现在想休息一下)/ They began to
search the room for the thief.(他们开始在屋子里搜寻小偷)/ He liked to have a swim
in the pool near his house.(他喜爱在靠家的水塘里面游泳)/ When did you learn to
speak English?(你什么时候开始学英语的？)/ Don’t forget to close the door when you
leave.(你离开时别忘了关门
[比较] He forgot to turn off the light.(他忘了关灯.) (没关)/ He forgot turning off the
40light.(他忘记关过灯.)(关了) / Please remember to ring me up.(记得给我打电话.)(还
没打电话) / I remember calling you yesterday but you forgot.(我记得昨天给你打电
话了,但是你忘记了.)(打过电话)
[B] 及物动词+疑问词+不定式：
谓语动词(vt.) +wh-疑问词+不定式 (作宾语) [说明]
tell (告诉) / show (显示) / know (知道) / what 不定式疑问
ask (问) / find out (发现) / understand where 形式还可以
+ how + to (do)
(明白) / wonder(疑惑) / learn(学会) / 作句子的主
who
forget(忘记) / remember(记得) / teach 语、表语等。
which
sb.(教某人) / discuss(商讨)
……
如：He does not know which one to take.(他不知道该选哪个)/ Tell me how to get to
the station.(告诉我怎么样去火车站)/ She asked me what to do for today’s
homework.(她问我今天家庭作业做什么)/ Can you teach me how to search the
internet?(你能教我怎样上网吗？)
[C] 不定式作宾语而后面又有宾语补足语时,通常用 it 代替作形式宾语,而不定式则
后置。如： I found it not very easy to learn to ride a bike.(我发现学骑车不很容
易)
⑤ 动词不定式可以在句子中用作定语,放在名词或代词后面。
[A] 记住下面的一些结构：
被修饰部分 + 不定式(作后置定 汉 语 意 思
语)
a key to lock the door 锁门的钥匙
a box to hold these things 装这些东西的箱子
give her a book to read 给她一本书读
Is there any (+名词/代词) to (do)? 有…要(做的)吗?
It’s time to go. 是走的时间了。/ 该走了。
Do you have any work to do? 你有工作要做吗?
I’d like something to eat. 我要点儿吃的。
I have nothing to say. 我没有话要说。
Would you like something to drink? 你要点儿喝的吗？
[B] 在这种情况下,如果不定式动词是不及物动词,则后面必须加介词。如：
They could not find a place to live in.(他们找不到住的地方)/ Please give me a chair
to sit on.(请给我一张椅子坐坐)/ He has got a writing brush to write with.((他找到
了写字的毛笔)
⑥ 动词不定式可以在句子中用作状语,有下列几种情况：
[A] 放在不及物动词(come, go, stop, finish, wait等词)的后面。如：He came to see her
yesterday.(他昨天来看望她)(表示来的目的)/ I stopped to have a rest.(我停下来休
息一会儿)(表示停下来的目的)
[B] 放在完整的谓语之后(即“谓语+宾语”、“谓语+宾语+补语”、“动词+表语”之
后)。如：We cleaned the room to let him play in it.(我们打扫了房间以便让他在
里面玩)/ I opened the window to see more clearly.(我打开窗子以便看得更清楚
点儿)
[C] 有时表示目的的不定式短语可以放在句首。如：To arrive there on time,I got up
one hour earlier than usual.(为了按时到达,我们比平时早起了一个小时)(表示
早起的目的)
[注意] stop to do 与stop doing的不同。如：They stopped to have a look.(他们停下
来看看)(不定式作“停下来”的目的状语)/ They stopped looking out of the window
and began to listen to the teahcher.(他们停止向窗外望,开始听老师讲课)(动名词
41作宾语,表示“停止”的内容)
⑦ 动词不定式可以在句子中用作表语,限用于连系动词之后。如：My job is to keep the
goal.(我的工作就是守住球门)
⑧ 动词不定式可以在句子中用作复合宾语中的宾语补足语。
+ 宾语 +不定式
谓 语 动 词(vt.)
(人 / 物) (作宾语补足语)
ask(请) / tell(关照) / teach(教) / want(想要) /
would like(想要) / get(让) / help(帮) / +sb. / sth. +to (do)
invite(邀请) / like(喜欢) / warn(警告) /
make(使得) / let(让) / hear(听) / see(看) /
feel(感觉) / watch(观看)/ have(使得) / +sb. / sth. + (do)
help(帮助)
如：Mum asked me to help her with the cooking.(妈妈叫我帮助她做饭)/ I would like
you to see my parents.(我想要你见见我的父母)/ The boss often made the workers
work 14 hours a day.(老板常让工人们一天工作14小时)/ Now let me hear you
play the violin.(现在让我来听你拉小提琴)
[注意] help之后做宾补的不定式符号to可以省略；hear / see / feel / watch之后的宾
补用不定式与现在分词时,含义不同,需特别注意,(参见现在分词部分)。试比较：
I heard her crying when I walked past.(我路过时听到她正在哭)(指当时瞬间的
情况)
I sat near her and heard her sing the new song.(我坐在她附近听她唱新歌)(指整
个过程)
(3)动名词
① 动名词由动词原形加词尾“ing”构成。动名词有动词的特征,可以跟宾语,可以被
状语修饰；它也有名词的特征,在句子中可以作主语、宾语(包括介词宾语)等。动
名词加相关词语(宾语或状语等)构成动名词短语。
② 动名词可以作主语。一般可用 it 作形式主语而将动名词短语后移。如：Learning
English all by yourself is not so easy.(自学好英语不那么容易)(=It is not so easy
learning English all by yourself.)
③ 动名词可以作宾语。
[A] want / need之后用动名词时,含有被动意思。如：Your car needs reparing badly.(你
的车急需修理。)(被修)My hair needs cutting.(我要理发。)(头发被理)
[B] remember / forge / stop / finish之后用动名词时,与用不定式含义不同。如：I forgot
to write a letter to him.(我忘了给他写封信)(根本没写) / I forgot writing a letter to
him.(我忘了给他写过信)(写了却忘了) / They stopped to look back.(他们停下来
向后看)(停下的目的是向后看) / They stopped looking back.(他们停止向后看)(不
向后看了)
[C] enjoy / mind / keep / hate/ go等词一般用动名词作宾语。如：Do you mind my
closing the door?(把门关上你介意吗？)/ She hates travelling by air.(她讨厌坐飞
机旅行)/ They went swimming every afternoon.(他们每天下午去游泳)/ I enjoy
walking around the town.(我喜欢在镇上转悠)
[D] like / love / start / begin / learn后面用动名词时,与用不定式意思相近或相同。如：
We began to study English when we were at primary school.(我们在小学时就开始
学英语了) / We began studying English when we were at primary school. (我们在
小学时就开始学英语了)
④ 动名词可以作表语,此时特别注意不要与现在进行时混淆。如：My job is putting
these parts together.(我的事情是把这些部件拼起来) / I am putting these parts
together.(我正在把这些部件拼起来)
．．
⑤ 动名词与现在分词构成相同,但是含义不同,动名词主要表示事情,而现在分词则主
要表示进行着的动作。如：Eating too much is not good for your health. (动名词短
42语,作主语) / Seeing is believing.(动名词短语,分别作主语和表语) / He ran after a
moving bus and got onto it.(现在分词,作定语) / His father saw him sitting on some
eggs.(现在分词,作宾补)
(4)分词： 包含现在分词和过去分词。(高中学习重点)
① 主要区别：现在分词一般有主动的意思或表示动作正在进行的意思；过去分词有
被动或动 作已经完成的意思。分词可以有自己的宾语或状语。
② 分词或分词短语在句子中作定语、状语和复合宾语等。
[A] 作定语：分词作定语时,一般要放在修饰的名词之前,分词短语作定语时,则要放
在所修饰的名词之后。 如：I have got a running nose.(我流鼻涕) / The woman
running after the thief shouted very loudly,“Stop the thief!”(跟着小偷追的妇女
大喊：捉小偷！) / Yesterday I met a man called Mr. Black.(昨天我遇见了一个名
叫布莱克先生的人)/ He only gave me a broken glass,so I was very angry with
him.(他只给了我一个坏玻璃杯,所以我很生他的气)
[B] 现在分词可以作下列动词的宾语补足语。(参考不定式作宾语补足语)
谓语动词(vt.) 宾语 宾语补足语
keep(保持) / see(看到) /
hear(听到) / watch(注意到) / sb./sth. (do)ing
feel(感觉到)
如：Mum kept me working all the week.(妈妈让我一个星期都在工作)/ When I
entered the room,I saw Jack eating a big pear.(我进入房间时看到杰克正在吃一
只大梨子)/ In the dark I felt something very cold moving on my foot.(黑暗之中我
感到有个冷的东西在我的脚上移动)
[C] 现在分词可以作状语,表示伴随情况。如：She came into the classroom,holding
a pile of papers in her hand.(他走进教室,手上抓着一沓纸)/ I am very busy these
days getting ready for the coming oral test.(这些日子我正忙着准备即将来到的口
语考试)
[D] 过去分词可以作表语,放在连系动词后面,但要注意不要与被动语态混淆,“主系
表”主要表示状态,而被动语态则表示动作。常用过去分词作表语的结构有：be
worried (焦虑) / be pleased (高兴) / be tired (疲劳) / get dressed (打扮好) / get lost
(迷路) / get caught (遭遇) / beome frustrated (沮丧) / become intereted in (对…感
兴趣)等等。例略。
[E] 过去分词可以作宾语补足语。如：I had my hair cut this morning.(今天早上我
让人给我理了发)(注意：have sth. done表示动作由别人来做,而have done sth.
则为现在完成时的结构,两个结构不可以混淆)
8、动词用法辨析：
(1)“Why not+动词原形+…?”(干嘛不……?)是简略句,完全形式是：Why don’t you +动词
原形+…?如：Why not go and have a look?(干嘛不去看看？)/ Why not try it once
again?(为什么不再试试？)
(2) seem(好象)的用法：记住几个结构：①sb./sth. + seem + (to be+)形容词+…；②sb./sth.
+ seem + like +…；③sb/sth + seem + to (do)；④It seems that + 从句。如：He seemed
(to be) very happy when he was called by the headmaster. (被校长叫到名字时他好象很
开心) / It seems that nobody else could do such a foolish thing except Jim. (除了吉姆好
象没有什么人会做出如此愚蠢的事情来)
(3) be afraid(害怕)的用法：记住几个结构：①be afraid of sth; be afraid of (doing); ②be
afraid to (do); ③be afraid that+从句。如：She is a little afraid of snakes.(她有点怕
蛇)/ Don’t be so afraid to stay at home alone at night.(别害怕晚上一个人在家)/ I’m
afraid that somebody will take his place because of his serious mistakes.(恐怕有人要取
代他了,因为他犯了那么大的错误)
43(4) be sorry(抱歉)的用法：记住几个结构：①be sorry for (sth); ②be sorry for (doing sth);
③be sorry to (do); ④be sorry that+从句。如：I am very sorry for keeping you waiting
so long.(不好意思让你久等了)I am sorry to trouble you.(对不起,麻烦你了)/ I am sorry
(that) he isn’t here at the moment.(恐怕他现在不在)
(5) be sure (确信)的用法：记住几个结构： ①be sure of (sth); ②be sure to(do); ③be sure
that+从句。如：She told me many times that she was sure to come.(她给我讲过多次她
一定会来的) / Are you sure of your answer?Maybe it’s wrong.(你对你的答案有把握
吗？也许是错的。)/ I am sure that Dad will help me with the job.(我确信爸爸会帮着
我做这件事情的)
(6) make 与do的用法：一般情况下表示进行活动或者做工作用do,表示创造建构某事物
用make. 如：I don’t know what to do.(我不知道该干什么)/ I’m not going to do any
work.(我不准备做什么)/ My father and I once made a boat.(我和我爸曾经做过一只
船)
此外还要记住一些固定说法：do good / harm / business / one’s best / a favour……
make a decision / an effort / a mistake / a noise / a phone call / money / war / the bed /
sure,...
(7)put on、wear、have…on、be in、try on、dress的用法：put on强调“穿、戴”这个动
作过程,wear则表示“穿着、戴着”这一状态,have+衣物+on主要表示状态,be in(+颜
色/衣物)也是表示一个状况,dress(+人)表示“给…人穿衣”。如：Please put on your
new shoes.(请穿上你的新鞋)/ The twins are wearing the same clothes.(双胞胎穿着相
同的衣服)/ Today she has an overcoat on.(今天她穿着一件大衣) / Do you know the
woman who is in black?(你认识那个身穿黑衣的女人吗？)/ Dad is dressing Tom
now.(爹正在给汤姆穿衣)
[注意]dress与wear或put on的区别：wear或put on常用衣物作宾语,而dress常用人
作宾语。表示给自己穿衣时常用“get dressed”或“dress oneself”表达。be dressed
in与wear基本同义。dress up意为“穿上盛装、乔装打扮”。如：Could you dress
the baby for me?(你能替我给宝宝穿衣吗？)/ He is eight but can’t dress himself.(他八
岁了,还不会穿衣服)/ She was dressed in a red coat.(她穿着一件红上衣)/ Do I have to
dress up to go to Jim’s party?(我得穿上好衣服去参加吉姆的聚会吗？)
(8)like、love与enjoy的用法：三个词都含有“喜欢”的意思,但是,like和enjoy后面跟动
名词,love 后面一般跟动词不定式 love to do sth.。like 后面有时跟动词不定式,表示
一种习惯或嗜好(往往与具体的时间或地点有关)。enjoy后面还可以加名词、反身代
词,表示“享受…乐趣；玩得开心”。如：Do you like shopping?(你喜欢购物吗？)/ He
likes to have a swim when he gets home every afternoon（习惯，与具体的时间有关）.(每
天下午放学后他总爱游个泳)/ They love to sing foreign songs.(他们喜爱唱外国歌曲)/
Did you enjoy yourself at the party?(在聚会上你玩得开心吗？)/ He enjoys living in
China.(他喜欢在中国生活)
(9)study、learn的用法： study主要表示“学习、研究”,指过程；而learn主要表示“学
会”,指结果。表示“学”时可以互换。如：How many subjects do you study?(你学多
少门课程？) / Have you learned it yet?(这个你学过了吗？)/ How long have you
studied/learned English?(你学英语多久了？)
learn还可以表示“听说”,如：He learned the musician himself was in town.(他听说
音乐家本人就在城里)
(10)think、want、would like的用法：三个词都含有“想”的意思,但think指“思考、考
虑”,want指“想要、愿望、企图”,would like指“想要”,think后面一般跟介词短
语或从句,want和would like后面跟名词或动词不定式。如：Do you think that China
will become a developed country in 40 years? (你认为中国会在40年后成为发达国家
吗？)/ I am thinking of the money I once lent to Li Min.((我正在想着以前借给黎敏的
钱)/ What do you really want to say?(你到底想干什么？)/ Which of these cakes would
you like (to have)?(这些饼子中你想吃哪些？)
(11)look for、search…for、find、find out的用法：前面两个词语表示动作过程,后面两个
44表示结果,look for指“寻找”不见的或丢失的东西,但还没有找到；search…for…指
“为找…而搜寻…”；find指“找到”了东西；find out主要指“查明一个事实真相”。
如：Hey, Monkey, what are you looking for in the cupboard?(嘿,猴儿！你在厨子里面
找什么呢？)/ Have you found the lost key to your car?(你找着丢失的车钥匙了吗？)/
The soldiers were searching the room for the spy when they heard a loud noise.(士兵们
正在房间里面搜寻间谍突然间他们听到了衣声巨响)/ Let’s try to find out who broke
the window.(让我们查查谁把窗子打破了)
[注解] find的几个结构：find sb. sth“为某人找到…”,find sth./sb. + adj./n.“发觉某人
是…”,find it +adj. + to do…(或+宾语从句)“发现(做……)如何”。如： His mother
found her daughter a very clever girl.(他的母亲发现她的女儿是个聪明的女孩)(名词
作补语补足语) / You can easily find it not good for your health to eat cold food.(你很
容易就会发现吃冷食对你的身体是不利的)
(12)listen to、hear的用法：两个词与听觉有关,listen to指“听”这一过程,hear指“听到”
这一结果。如：Are you listening to me, Jim? Yes, I have heard your words. (吉姆,你在
听我说吗？是的,你的话我全听见了)
(13)look、see、watch、read的用法：四个词均与眼睛有关,look指放眼去“看”(不管是
否看得到),指“看”的过程；see指“看见”这一结果,有时see还引申为“明白”,表
示“看”时后面加“电影”等词，see the film/film ；watch指专注的看,含有“注视、
监视”之义,后面常跟“电视、比赛”等词；read 限制为看书面材料,译为“看、阅
读”,后面跟“书、报纸、杂志”等词。如：What are you looking at?(你在看什么？)/
Please look at the blackboard. (请看黑板)/ Let me go to see the film, mum, will you? (妈
妈,让我去看电影吧,好吗？)/ He won’t feel well until he finishes watching the football
match. (要看完了足球赛他才会感觉好些)/ Reading gives us knowledge.(阅读给我们
知识)
(14)hear、hear of、hear from、learn的用法： hear“听说”,后面可以跟名词、代词、
从句表示听见的内容,hear of“听说”,后面跟人,指对某人有耳闻但没有见过面；hear
from“收到……的来信”,后面加人；learn“听说、得知”,后面跟从句,含义与hear
相似。如：I hear Mr Green is coming to see us tonight. (我听说格林先生今晚要来看
望我们)/ Have you ever heard of the man who once went to the Himalaya Mountains?
(你是否听说过那个去过喜马拉雅山的人？)/ How often do you hear from your father?
(隔多久你收到你父亲的信？)/ He learned the musician himself was in town.(他听说
音乐家本人就在城里)
(15)speak、talk、say、tell的用法：四个词与“说”有关。speak“讲话、发言、演说”,
是不及物动词,涉及人时要加介词 to,speak 作及物动词时后面跟语言名称；talk“谈
话、闲谈”,是不及物动词,涉及人时用介词with、to等,涉及事情时后面跟介词about
等；say 是及物动词,后面跟名词、代词、从句等,表示说的内容；tell是及物动词,后
面首先要跟人,然后再跟从句或者介词短语等。如：Do you speak English? (你讲英语
吗？)/ Who spoke at the meeting? (谁在会上发了言？)/ Our teacher is talking to Lin
Tao’s parent. (我们的老师正在跟林涛的家长讲话)/ Can you say it in English? (你能
用英语说出它吗？)/ Please tell me something about the strange flying object. (请跟我
讲讲那个奇怪的飞行物的事情吧)
(16)be able to(do)、can的用法：can是情态动词,有许多含义,表示“可能、可以、会”等
意思,只有①现在式can和过去式could两种形式；be able to表示能力上“会”,有
多种时态形式,to 后面跟动词原形,有时可以与 can/could 互换。如：Can you speak
English? (你会说英语吗？)/ He couldn’t(wasn’t able to) swim when he was 12. (他十
二岁时不会游泳)
表示成功的做了某事时，只能用be able to.如：
He was able to flee Europe before the war broke out.
(17)there be、have的用法：两个词都可以译为“有”,但是,have表示的是“拥有”,主语
必须是人或者物；there be表示“存在”的概念,主语在there be之后。如：How many
brothers and sisters do you have? I have only one brother. (你有多少兄弟？我只有
45一个兄弟。)/ How many chairs and desks are there in their classroom? There is none.
(他们教室里有多少张桌椅？一张也没有。)
[注解]there be sb./sth doing与there be sb./sth to do 有所不同：用doing表示一个正
在发生的事情,而用to do 则表示尚未做的即将要做的动作。如： Look! There is a
dog lying on the stairway. / Take your time. There is nothing for you to do tonight.
(18)borrow、lend、keep的用法：表示“借”的三个词,borrow“借进”、lend“借出”都
是一次性动作,不可以和表示一段的时间状语连用；keep“保存”用来表示借一段时
间。如： I have lost the book I borrowed from my teacher. What can I do? (我丢掉了
从老师那里借来的书)/ How long have you kept my dictionary,eh?For more than two
months! (呃,我的字典你借了多久了？两个多月了！)
(19)bring、take、carry、send、lift的用法：bring指从远处“拿来”，是从别处把东西带
到这里来,如：Can you bring me that glass? 你能给我拿那个杯子吗？；take指从面前
“拿走”，把人或物拿到别处，不是说话的地方，如：Please take the letter to the post
office .；carry指一般的搬运, 不涉及方向；send主要指“送、派遣、寄”；lift指把
东西由低向高“提起、拎起”。例略。
(20)hope、wish的用法：两个词都表示“希望”,但是,hope表达有把握或信心实现的事情,
后面直接跟动词不定式或者宾语从句,不可以跟动名词或作宾语补足语的不定式；
wish 表达实现的可能性不大的事情,后面跟名词、宾语从句(用过去时)或者作宾语补
足语的不定式。如：We all hope to see him very soon. (我们全都希望尽快见到他)/ I hope
it will be fine tomorrow so that we can go out. (我希望明天天好,这样我们就能出去了。)/
How I wish it was not raining at the moment!(我多么希望此刻不在下雨！)(事实上天正
在下雨，虚拟语气)
(21)take、spend、pay、cost的用法：①看主语 ②看结构
spend的宾语通常是金钱或时间,句型：sb.+(spend)+时间/金钱+on sth / (in) doing sth. ；
take的主语通常是事情,句型：sth./It + (take)+sb.+时间+to do… 。(如果是动作则常用
it作形式主语将动词不定式后移)；
cost的宾语通常是时间、金钱、力气,句型：sth. +(cost)+sb.+时间/金钱/力气. ；
pay的宾语通常是金钱,句型：sb.+(pay)+金钱+for+事物.
如：She spent the whole night reading the novel. (她花了一个晚上看那本小说)/ This job
will take me two days.=It will take me two days to do the job. (做这件事情要花我两天的
时间)/ How much does a house like this cost? (像这样的房子要花多少钱？)/ I paid him
twenty dollars for the book.. (我花了20元从他那儿买了书)
(22)begin、start的用法：begin在大多数情况下可以替代start,(反义词是end),后面接不定
式或动名词时区别不大,但是 start 还可以表示“开始、出发、启动”,反义词是 stop；
某事停止后再重新开始一般用start.如：When did you begin/start to learn English? (你
什么时候开始学英语的？)/ They started getting in the crops after the rain stopped. (雨
停后他们开始收割庄稼) / This time he could not start his car. (这次他没法启动他的汽
车)
(23)arrive in/at、reach、get to的用法：arrive是不及物动词,到达具体地点(单位，学校，
家，车站)时后面加介词at , The new teacher arrived at our school . We arrived at the station
just now,到达一个大的地方(国家、地区、城市)时后面加介词in，如：We arrived in Paris
yesterday, arrive后面可以直接跟地点副词here/there/home等；get表示“到达”时是
不及物动词,涉及地点(无论大小)时后面加 to,get 后面可以直接跟地点副词 here 等；
reach是及物动词,后面直接跟地点名词。如：He arrived in San Francisco last Sunday.
(上个星期天他抵达旧金山)/ How did you get there in the night? (你是怎样在夜间到达
那里的？)/ We hurried all the way and reached the station just five minutes before the
train left. (我们一路狂奔在火车启动前5分钟到达车站)
46(24)be made of、be made from、be made into、be made in、be made by、be made for的区
别：be made of指从制成品中可以看得出原材料,而be made from则指从制成品中看
不出原材料,口语中都可以换成be made out of。 be made into表示“被制成……”,be
made in表达被制造的地点,be made by表达制造的人,be made for表达被制造的目的。
如：This kind of paper is made from bamboo. (这种纸是由竹子生产的)/ The desk is made
of wood and metal. (桌子是铁和木头打的)/ A lot of paper has been made into paper birds.
(许多纸被折叠成了小鸟)/ Computers are made in these cities. (计算机是在这几个城市
制造的)/ This kite was made by Uncle Wang. (这个风筝是王叔叔做的)/ A big bag was
made for me to hold my waste things.(一只大包做好了让我装废物)
(25)be used for、be used to、used to、get used to的区别：be used for + 名词/代词或动名
词, be used to + 动词原形,表示两个短语意思相近,表示“用于…”。 used to + 动词
原形,表示“过去常常”,否定式可以是“didn’t use to”也可以是“usedn’t to”；get/be
used to + 动名词,表示“习惯于….”。如：A knife can be used for cutting things.(刀可
以用来割东西)/ A knife can be used to cut things.(刀可以用来割东西)/ He used to borrow
novels from the library when he was at school. (他上学时常常在图书馆借书)/ He is used
to getting up early in the morning. (他习惯早起)(注意：be used to 表示“被用作”和
“习惯于”的区别)
(26)beat,win与lose： beat (打败),后面跟“人”,而win(赢得),后面跟“比赛、竞赛”等。
如：Who won at last? (最后谁赢了？)/ Class Three beat us 5-0. (三班以5∶0打败了我
们)/ I am sure to win the match. (我一定能赢得比赛)
而lose则表示“输了”,常用句型：lose sth. to sb. 如：Unluckily we lost the match to
Class Three. (不幸的是我们比赛输给了三班)
(27)grow、plant、keep的区别：plant着重讲“栽、种植”这个动作,grow则指种植以后
的“栽培”、“管理”,而 keep 则主要指“喂养”、“赡养”一个人或者动物。如 ：He
grew vegetables in his garden. (他在园子里种菜)/ I planted ten trees last year,but four of
them died. (去年我栽了10棵树,但是死了4棵)/ Old women enjoy keeping cats or dogs
to kill the time. (老年的妇女喜欢养猫养狗打发时间)
(28)fall 、drop的区别：fall指东西由高处向下坠落,不及物动词；也可以作连系动词,意
思是“变得,进入某种状态”。drop表示物体由高处往低处落下,不及物动词；或让物体
落向低处,及物动词。如：The man fell off the tractor and hurt himself. (那个人从拖拉
机上摔下来跌伤了)/ Soon after they touched the pillows they fell (系动词) fast asleep.
(他们头挨枕头不久就睡着了)/ He felt as if he had to drop maths.(他觉得似乎要放弃数
学)/ He dropped a letter into the mail-box.(他向邮箱里丢了一封信)
(29)join、join in、take part in的区别：join多指参加组织、团体、党派等,后面跟人时表
示和某人一起参加某项活动；join in指参加某项游戏或活动；take part in多指参加群
众性的活动、运动、会议等。如：He joined the army in 2001.(他2001年参军)/ They
joined me in congratulating you.(他们和我一起向你祝贺)/ Do join us in the game.(千万
参加我们的比赛) / He took an active part in the students’ movement in the 1940s.(在二
十世纪40年代他积极参加学生运动)
(30)beat、hit、strike的用法区别：beat指“连续不断地打击；(心脏的)跳动”；hit指“一
次性地撞击、命中”；strike与hit基本同义,还可以理解为“划(火柴)、给……深刻的
印象”。如：The man looks dead, but his heart is still beating weakly. (那个人看上去死
了可心脏还在微弱地跳动) / He hit the ball so hard that it flew over their heads and fell
into the lake. (他踢球的劲太大球飞过他们的头顶落入水中) / He went into the room and
struck a match(火柴). (他走进房间划着了一根火柴)
(31)carry on、carry out的区别：carry on表示“进行、继续”；carry out表示“执行、
贯彻”。如：I will carry on the work. (我会继续工作)/ I have some difficulties in carrying
out his orders. (对于执行他的命令我有问题)
(32)be amazed与be surprised的区别：be amazed“感到惊讶”,指人对某个不可能（可
能是自认为的）发生却实际发生了的事情感到极其的讶异；be surprised“感到吃惊”
指人对突发的事件感到惊讶。如：When he dived deep into the sea, he was amazed at
47the colours of all the beautiful coral reefs. (他深潜到海中时被所有美丽的珊瑚礁惊呆
了)（原先可能想不到世上会有这么美的珊瑚） / He was very surprised when he heard
a loud noise from inside the room. (听到房间里传出一个很大的声音他非常地吃惊)（突
然传出来的声响）
(33)warn的用法：“warn sb. of/about sth”意思是“针对…而警告某人”；“warn sb (not)
to do sth”意思是“告戒某人(不)要做某事”；“warn sb. + that从句”意思是“警告某
人说……”。如：They warned the passengers of thieves. (他警告路人小心窃贼) / I warn
you that you will fail in the coming exams if you are still so lazy. (我警告你：如果你还
这么懒在即将来到的考试中你会不及格的。) / He was warned not to go out in the late
night. (他受到警告不要在深夜出去)
(34)think of与think about等短语的区别：think of表示“考虑、思念、认为、想起、建
议”等；“think about”表示“看待、认为”，表示对某事的看法；“think much /highly
/a lot of”表示“高度评价…”；“think over”表示“仔细考虑”；“think out”表示“想
出”。如：The headmaster thought highly of this boy. (校长高度地评价了这个男孩) /
We’re thinking of going to France for our holiday. (我们在考虑去法国度假的事情) /
Think it over and you will have a way. (仔细考虑就有办法) / I cannot think of his name.
I forgot it. (我想不起他的名字我忘了) / －What do you think about his composition?
－Very good! (他的作文你觉得怎么样？ 很好。)
(35)agree with/ agree to / agree on等词语用法：“agree to+动词”表示“同意做某事”,
“agree with + sb./观点”表示“赞同…的观点”/ agree about表示“对…话题有相同
看法”/“agree to +建议”表示“同意”某人的建议，agree to your advice,“agree on +
决定”表示“赞成某人的决定”, agree on your decision。例略。
(36)deserve(应该,应得)的用法：deserve后面可以加不定式,也可以加名词或动名词。如：
They had tried their best and they deserved to win. (他们尽力了该赢。) / The little boy
always made troubles around and deserved beating. (小男孩总是处处惹麻烦活该被打) /
The girl did a good deed and deserved praise. (女孩做了好事应该受到表扬)
第九章 连接词
1、连词的含义：连接 词与词、短语与短语、或引导从句的词叫连接词。
2、连词的分类：连词分为并列连接词和从属连接词两种。
1、并列连接词连接并列的词、短语、从句或句子。常见的并列连接词有：and(和),but(但
是),or(或者,否则),nor(也不), so(所以), however(然而,无论如何),for(因为),still(可是),as
well as(也),both..and...(...和...), not only ...but also...(不但…而且…), either… or…(或…
或…),neither… nor…(既不…也不…)等。
2、从属连接词用于引导从句,常见的从属连接词有：
when(当…时候), while(正当…时候), after(在…之后), before(在…之前), since(自从),
until(直到), although/though(虽然), if(假如), as(如…一样；由于), as …as…(和…一样),
as far as(就…而言), as long as(只要), as soon as(一…就…), even if(即使), because(因
为), unless (除非), than(比…), whether (是否…), in order that…(为了), so…that…(如
此…以致), so that…(以便), now that…(现在既然), by the time…(到…时候), every
time…(每当), as if…(仿佛),no matter when(或whenever)(无论何时),no matter where(或
wherever)(无论在哪里)等。
［辨析］
(1) because、as、since、for 的用法：because(因为)表示原因的语气最强,常表示必然的
因果关系,从句一般放在主句后面；另外,回答 why 的问句只能用 because. as(因为)
表示一般的因果关系,语气比because弱,说明比较明显的原因,它引导的从句可以放在
句首也可以放在句尾。since(既然)表示对方已经知道、无需加以说明的原因或事实。
for(因为)是并列连词,语气较弱,用来补充说明理由或提供一种解释。如：He is not at
school today because he is seriously ill.（他今天没有上学因为他病得厉害）/ As all of
you have got here, now, let’s go to the zoo.（既然大伙儿都到了我们就去动物园吧）/ I
48will ask Lin Tao to go with me since you are very busy.（既然你很忙我就叫林涛和我一
起去吧）/ We must be off now for the match starts at 7：00.（我们得走了因为比赛在七
点开始）
(2)if、whether的区别：表示“是否”时,if和 whether同义,引导宾语从句,另外,whether
还可以引导主语从句、表语从句(以及同位语从句)等名词性从句或者让步状语从句；
而if还可以表示“如果”,引导条件状语从句, (主句与从句遵循主将从现的原则)。如：
I don’t know if/whether he will arrive on time.（我不知道他是不是会按时到达）/ I will
ring you up if he arrives on time.（如果他按时到达我会给你打电话的）
[注意]下列情况只能用whether不能用if：①引导主语从句,②引导表语从句,③引导从
．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．
句作介词宾语,④引导不定式短语,⑤引导让步状语从句,⑥在动词 discuss 之后,⑦在
wonder / not sure之后,⑧在if与whether含义易混时。如：Whether it is a fine day next
Sunday is still a question.（下个星期天是不是个好天还是个问题）(引导主语从句) /
Please ask him whether to go there with a raincoat or not.（请问一下带不带雨衣去那
儿）(作动词的宾语) / Hainan is the place to be, whether it’s summer or winter.（海南是
个该去的地方无论冬夏）(引导让步状语从句)/ Please let me know whether you need my
help.（请告诉我你是否需要我的帮助）(引导宾语从句)(如果换成if则还可能表示“如
果你需要我的帮助请告知”)
(3)while、when、as的用法区别：while常表示一个较长的动作,它引导的从句动作与主
句的动作是只能是同时发生的、是平行的；when 可以表示较短的动作也可以表示较
长的动作,主句和从句的动作可以同时发生也可以先后发生；as与上两词同义,可替换
while 和when, 表示主句和从句的动作同时发生,常译为“一边……一边……”。如：
Please do not trouble me while I am writing my homework.（我写作业时请不要打扰我）
/ I’ll go home when I have finished my job.（我干完了活儿就回去）(不是同时发生)/
They were running quickly across the road when they heard the sound of a truck coming.
（他们正快速地穿过马路忽然听到了卡车开来的声音）/ As we walked in the dark street,
we sang songs and talked loudly.（当我们在黑洞洞的街上走路时我们高声地唱歌说话）
(4)till/until 与 not…till/until 的区别：前者表示一个延续性的动作,后者表示一个才开始
的动作。如：I will stay here and watch the baby until you return.（我会呆在这里看着
娃娃直到你回来）(stay这个动作一直进行到你return) / They won’t go on working until
they get what they think is reasonable.（他们要到获得了他们认为合理的东西时才会继
续干下去的）
另外till与until基本可以互换,但是在句首时只能用until,不能用till. 如：Until the last
minute of the match we kept playing.（我们坚持到比赛的最后一分钟）/ Not until he had
finished his work did he go home.（直到做完工作他才回家）（倒装句）
(5)though与although的区别：两个词都表示“虽然”,均不可以与but同时使用,但在句
中可加 still 或 yet 连用。although“尽管、虽然”仅作连词,比较正式,一般可以换为
though； though“虽然、尽管、即使”,①还可以与even连用(=even if),表示“即使、
纵然”,②作副词时意思是“然而、不过”,不能放在句首。③although不能放在句末，
though则可以，用“，”隔开。如：He passed the exams although illness prevented him
from going to classes（. 尽管疾病使他无法上课但是他还是通过了考试）/ she won’t leave
the TV set,even though her husband is waiting for her for the supper.（她不愿离开电视
机虽然丈夫在等她吃饭）/ It was a quiet party. I had a good time, though.（这是个不热
闹的聚会尽管如此我还是玩得很开心）
(6)prefer to…rather than…与prefer…to…的区别：prefer to…rather than…后面都是用动词
原形,prefer…to…都是用动名词或名词。如：I prefer English to Japanese.（与日语相比
我更喜欢英语）/ I prefer to learn English rather than learn Japanese. （与日语相比我更
喜欢学英语）
第十章 简单句
491、简单句的特点：简单句通常只由一个主语(或并列主语)和一个谓语(或并列谓语)构成。
2、简单句的种类：简单句一般分为陈述句、疑问句、感叹句和祈使句四种。
3、陈述句：
用来说明一个事实的句子叫陈述句。它有肯定式和否定式两种形式。
▲陈述句的肯定式： He is a middle school student.（他是个中学生）/ I have a hammer
in my hand.（我手上有把锤子）/ She teaches us geography.（她教我们地理）/ The new
play was good enough and everybody enjoyed it.（新的话剧非常好大家都喜欢）
▲陈述句的否定式：
1)谓语动词如果是 be 、助动词、情态动词时,在它们的后面加“not”。如：My brother
is not a teacher.（我的弟弟不是教师）/ He does not have a cousin.（他没有堂兄弟）
/ I will not go there tomorrow.（明天我不去那儿）/ My mother is not cooking a meal
in the kitchen（. 我母亲现在不在厨房里做饭）/ You must not make such mistakes again.
（你不该再犯类似错误了） / We haven’t discussed the question yet（我们还没有讨
论那个问题呢）.
2)谓语动词如果没有上述词语而是其他动词时,须在它的前面加 do not(don’t).如： I
don’t know anything about it.(此事我一无所知) / Li Ming does not feed pigs in the
countryside.（李明不在农村养猪）/ We didn’t expect to meet her right here.（我们没
指望着在这里见到她）/ We didn’t have a meeting yesterday afternoon.(昨天下午我们
没有开会)
3)如果“have”作“有”讲,也可以在它后面加not构成否定式,其形式与have got的否
定式相同。 如：I haven’t (got) any brothers or sisters.（我没有兄弟姐妹）
have 的否定形式：
① 当表示“有”的意思时，可以采用以下三种形式：have+not；do not+ have；
have+ no+ n. 如：I have not enough food to eat.= I do not have
enough food to eat. =I have no enough food to eat.
② 当have为助动词时，用“have+ not”结构。如：I have not been toShanghai。
③ 当have既不表示“有”，也不作助动词用时，用“do not+ have”结构。
I didn’t have breakfast this morning.
具体到反义疑问句中，则遵循以下原则：
a.当have表示“有”含义时，反意疑部问部分可以用have形式，也可以用do形式。
例如：
He has a book in his hand, hasn't he?
He has a book in his hand, doesn't he?
b.当陈述部分的动词是 have“有”的否定形式时，反意疑问部分是用 have 形式还是
用do形式，取决于陈述部分的动词形式。例如：
You haven't a car, have you?
You don't have any money with you, do you?
c.当have不表示“有”含义而表示其他含义时，反意疑问句则必须用do的形式。例
如：
We had a good time in the vacation, didn't we?
He has his breakfast at seven everyday, doesn't he?
You have to get up early tomorrow, don't you?
[注意]
①句子中如果有all、both、very much/well等词时,用not一般构成部分否定,如果要完
全否定,则通常使用none、neither、not…at all等；All of them went there.→None of
them went there.（他们全都去了那里→他们全都没去那里）
②句子中含有little、few、too(太)、hardly、never、neither、nor、seldom等词时, 则
视为否定句。如：Few people live there because life there is very hard.（几乎没有人
50生活在那里因为那里的生活太艰难了）
③陈述句(主语+谓语+其他)在口语中可以直接表示疑问,表示惊讶或明知故问。如：
That’s your boss?（那就是你的老板？！）
④陈述句一般情况下应使用正常的语序, 即：主语+谓语+其他。但是有时会倒装,详见
“倒装句”。
⑤所有的从句一律使用陈述句语序,即在连接词后采用“主语+谓语+其他”的顺序。
如：The old man told me that he would live here for ten more years before he returns
home. （老人告诉我说他还要在这儿住几年然后回家）/ Could you tell me who you
saw at the party last night?（能告诉我在聚会上你都看见了谁吗？）
4、疑问句：
▲一般疑问句：提问所述情况是否符合事实，要求用是还是不是，对还是错（用“yes”
或“no”）来回答的疑问句叫做一般疑问句。
1)一般疑问句构成：句中谓语动词是 be、情态动词时,则将它们(提前)放到主语前面。
（即把主语和be，情态动词调换位置），即“be/情态动词+主语+----”如：Is
he an engineer?（他是工程师吗？）/ Have you got today’s newspaper? （你有今天
的报纸吗？）（特殊情况）/ Shall we go to see a film this evening? （我们今晚去看
电影好吗？）/ Can you explain it ?（你能解释它吗？）/ Is there any fish for supper?
（晚饭有鱼吗？）/ Would you like to go out for a walk?（你想出去散步吗？）
谓语动词如果没有上述词语而是其他动词时, 则在主语前面加助动词do / does / did,
原来的谓语动词改为原形，即“do+主语+动词原形”。如：Do you get up at six every
morning?（你天天早晨六点起身吗？）/ Does she study hard?（她学习努力吗？）/
Did you go there yesterday?（昨天你去那儿了吗？）
2)一般疑问句的回答：
一般疑问句通常用简略形式来回答。如：
Will you join us in playing basketball?（你加入我们打篮球好吗？）—Yes, we will.（是
的我们会。）/ —No, we won’t.（不我们不会。）
Have you got today’s newspaper?（你有今天的报纸吗？）—Yes, I have .（是的有。）
/ —No, I haven’t.（不没有。）
回答时所用的时态应和问句里的时态一致。
[注意] 回答must或者may开头的疑问句要小心,参见情态动词有关内容。
3)一般疑问句的否定结构：be/助动词/情态动词+not+主语+---- 或：be/助动词/情态动
词+主语+not+----如：
Will he not come?=Will not he come?（他难道不来吗？）/ Isn’t your sister a Party
member?=Is your sister not a Party member?（你的姐姐不是党员吗？）/ Don’t you
like the play?=Do you not like the play?
否定疑问句并不单纯的表示提问，它常带有强烈的感情色彩，而且完全式比简略式
所表达的语气更强烈：
①常带有惊异，责难或赞叹的语气，如：Haven’t you read the newspaper? 你没看过
这份报纸？②有时暗示提问者期待着肯定的回答，如：Shouldn’t we start now? 我
们是不是该动身了？ Wasn’t it an interesting film? 那部电影不是很有趣吗？ ③有
时表示邀请或建议，如：Wouldn’t you go with me? 你不和我一起去吗？Won’t you
have a cup of coffee? 你不喝杯咖啡吗？
注意：这种否定结构的疑问句的回答与汉语的习惯不同。如果回答是肯定的,就用
“yes+肯定结构”；如果回答是否定的,就用“no+否定结构”。(情况与反意问句类似。)
如：
Can’t he answer the question? (他不能回答这个问题吗？)
—Yes, he can.(不,他能回答这个问题。) —No,he can’t. (是的,他不能回答这个问
题。)（不管怎么问，如果事实上是“是的”，则用 yes，如果事实上“不是，不能
做某件事的”，则说“no”。
51▲特殊疑问句：询问其语句中所缺失的部分，或者说，是要求得到暂时不知道的信息：
什么，哪里，怎么样，多少，等等。
特殊疑问句是提问实质内容的（要求得到有实质内容回答的，而不简单的回答是否）。
特殊疑问词，就是用来代替句子中缺失的东西——你要询问的东西的。
What ＋ is it？
Who ＋ is your teacher?
从这里也看到了，不管从语法角度，还是实际理解角度，如果单是后面的一般疑问句，它
是不完整的。
1)特殊疑问句结构是：疑问词+ 一般疑问句+-----？
疑问代词
除who以外的疑问代词短语 +一般疑问句+？
疑问副词
如：What do you want?（你要什么？）/ Who(m) are you looking for ?（你在找谁？）
/ Whose magazine is this?（这是谁的杂志？）/Which class are you in?（你在哪班？）
/ When did you get up this morning?（你今早什么时候起身的？）/ Where have you
been?（你到哪儿去了？）/ Why did he go to bed so early?（他为什么这么早睡觉？）
/ How did you go there?（你是怎么去的那儿？）
非重点，可以省略：但是,“who”引出的询问主语或主语部分相关词的特殊疑问句的
结构与陈述句词序相同：如：Who is dancing over there?（谁在那边跳舞？），Who
dances best in your class? 班级里谁跳舞最好？
有时“what”,“which”,“whose”也可以引出与陈述句词序相同的特殊疑问句。如：
What is on the wall?（什么东西在墙上？/墙上有什么？）/ Which is yours?（哪个是
你的？）/ Whose book is in your bag?（谁的书在你的书包里？）（谓语动词是be时）
[注意]从陈述句改为特殊问句时,先将剔除掉划线部分的句子改为一般问句,再将(划
线)提问部分更改为疑问词置于句首,特别要注意助动词的使用！如果只对主语或主
语的修饰词提问,那么只需要将疑问部分改为疑问词即可。
2)常用疑问代词和疑问副词：
疑问代词： who, whom, whose, which, what,
疑问副词： when, where, why, how,
how构成的短语：how many (多少个) (独立用；或跟可数名词), how much (多少) (独
立用；或跟不可数名词), how old (多大年纪), how far (多远), how often (多常),how
long (多久,多长), how soon (多久以后),how many times (多少次),等等。
3)特殊疑问句有时也用否定式。如：Why don’t you ask Jim instead?(常缩略为 Why
not…?) (你为什么不转请Jim呢？)
4) 特殊疑问句疑问部分有时可以有两个以上的疑问词。如：When and where were you
born? (你是何时何地出生的？)
5) 疑问词如果是介词的宾语, 则该介词可以在句首,也可以在句尾。如：What do you
want a computer for? = For what do you want a computer? (你干嘛要一台电脑呢？)
▲反意疑问句： 反意疑问句表示对陈述句所说的事实提出相反的疑问,要求对方用“yes”
或“no”来进行回答。
1) 构成：陈述句+附加问句。由两部分组成：前一部分是陈述句,后一部分是疑问句,
它是由 be ,have, 助动词或情态动词+主语构成。如果陈述句是肯定结构,反
意疑问句须用否定结构；反之,陈述句如果是否定结构,反意疑问句须用肯定
结构。反意疑问句的两部分, 必须保持人称和时态的一致；反意疑问句的回
答有时会和汉语不同。
陈述句部分 附加问句部分 注 意 点
否定的简短一般问 当陈述句部分含有“是”动词、(“有”
肯定陈述句
句 动词)、情态动词和助动词时,简短问句
52肯定的简短一般问 中沿用该词；否则就使用do/does//did.
否定陈述句
句
如：He is old, isn’t he? (他老了不是吗？) / The man went away, didn’t he? (那个男人
走开了不是吗？) / He isn’t old, is he? (他不老是吗？) / He never went there, did
he? (他从没有去过那里是吗？)
2) 反意问句的回答：
无论哪种形式的反意问句,回答时要遵循：“Yes,+肯定式”或者“No,+否定式”
如：The man went away, didn’t he?(那人走开了,不是吗？)
——Yes, he did.(是的,他走了。)/ No, he didn’t.(不,他没有走。)
The man never went there, did he?(这人从来不去那里,是吗？)
——Yes, he did.(不是呀,他去的。)/ No, he didn’t.(是呀,他不去。)
特殊句型：
1.祈使句。祈使句后一般加上will you或won’t you构成反义疑问句，用will you多表示“请
求”，用won’t you多表示提醒对方注意。例如：
let引导的祈使句有两种情况：①let’s---，后的反义疑问句用shall we或shan’t we。如：Let’s
go home, shan’t we? 回家吧，好吗？②let us/me--- 后的反义疑问句用will you或won’t you。
如：let me have a try, won’t you?
其他祈使句都用will you或won’t you回答。
2.反意疑问句的陈述部分含有由un-, im-, in-, dis-, 等否定意义的前缀构成的词语时，
陈述部分要视为肯定含义，问句部分用否定形式。
①Your father is unhappy, isn’t he? （不能用is he?）
②The man is dishonest, isn’t he? （不能用is he?）
③It is impossible to learn English without remembering more words, isn’t it?
（不能用is it ?）
3. 反 意 疑 问 句 的 陈 述 部 分 带 有 little, few, never, hardly, seldom ，
not,no,nobody,nothing, none, neither等否定意义的词时，问句部分用肯定式。如：
①She never tells a lie, does she? （不用doesn’t she?）
②He was seldom late, was he?（不用wasn’t he?）
4.反意疑问句的陈述部分为I am……时，问句部分虽然也可用“am not I”，但习惯上用
aren’t I？表示。如：I am a very honest man, aren’t I?
5.反意疑问句的陈述部分为I(We)第一人称 think(believe, suppose, consider) + that
从句时，问句部分的动词及主语与that从句内的动词和主语保持一致。如：①I think that
he has done his best, hasn’t he?
②We think that English is very useful, isn’t it? （不用don’t we?）
6.反意疑问句的陈述部分为I(We) don’t think(believe, suppose, consider)+ that
从句时，从句为否定意义，问句部分的动词和主语仍与that从句保持一致且用肯定式。如：
①I don’t think that you can do it, can you? （不用do I?）
②We don’t believe that the news is true, is it? （不用do we?）
7.反意疑问句的陈述部分为非第一人称主语+ think(believe, suppose, consider) +
that从句时，问句部分的动词和主语与陈述部分的主句动词和主语保持一致。如：
①They all think that English is very important, don’t they? （不用isn’t it?）
②He didn’t think that the news was true, did he? （不用wasn’t/ was it?）
8.反意疑问句的陈述部分为主语+said( told, reported, asked……) + that从句时，问
句部分的动词和主语与陈述部分的主句动词和主语保持一致。如：①They said that you
had finished your work, didn’t they? （不用hadn’t you）
②Kate told you that she would go there, didn’t she? （不用wouldn’t she?）
9.陈述部分的主语为不定代词something, anything, nothing, everything时，问句部
分的主语用it。如：
①Something is wrong with the computer, isn’t it?
②Nothing has happened to them, has it?
10.陈述部分的主语为不定代词somebody(someone), anybody(anyone), nobody(no one),
53everybody(everyone)，no, none, neither 时，问句部分的主语用 he 或 they(通常用
they)，这时问句动词的数应和he或 they一致。如：①Someone has taken the seat,
hasn’t he?
②Everyone has done his best in the game, haven’t they?
11.陈述部分为Let me……时，问句部分习惯上用shall I? 或will you?形式。如：Let
me have a try, shall I?(will you?)
12.陈述部分为Let us……时，问句部分习惯上用will you?形式。如：Let us stop to
rest, will you?
13.陈述部分为Let’s……时，问句部分习惯上用shall we?形式。如：Let’s go home
together, shall we?
14.陈述部分用上述情况以外的祈使句时，问句部分一般用 will you?形式表示请求，用
won’t you？形式表示委婉请求或邀请（即两种情况都可出现，不必遵循前否后肯或前肯
后否的原则）。如：
①Do sit down, won’t you?/ will you? ②You feed the bird today, will you?
③Please open the window, will you?(won’t you?)
15.陈述部分为否定祈使句时，问句部分一般用will you?形式。如：Don’t make any noise,
will you?
16.陈述部分为There (Here) + be + 主语时，问句部分用be+there(here)?形式。如：
①There are two cakes on the plate, aren’t there?
Here is a story about Mark Twain, isn’t here?
17.陈述部分用had better +原形动词表示建议时，问句部分用hadn’t +主语？形式。
①You’d better tell him about the matter, hadn’t you?②We had better do it by
ourselves, hadn’t we?
18.陈述部分用used to +主语时，问句部分用didn’t + 主语？或usedn’t +主语？形
式。
①He used to live in the country, didn’t he?/usedn’t he?
②They used to be good friends, didn’t they?/usedn’t they?
19.陈述部分用must(may, might) + have + V-ed表示推测时，若句中带有明显的过去时
间的状语，问句部分动词用过去时形式。如：
①He might have forgotten his pen in the classroom yesterday, didn’t he? （不
用mightn’t he?/ hasn’t he?）
②You must have got up late this morning, didn’t you?（不用 mustn’t
you?/haven’t you?）
20.陈述部分用must(may, might) + have + V-ed表示推测时，若句中没有带明显的过去
时间的状语，问句部分动词用现在完成时形式。如：
①Everyone must have known the death of the waitress, haven’t they? （不用
mustn’t they?）
②You must have worked there a year ago, didn’t you?（不用mustn’t you?/
haven’t you?）
21.陈述部分的主语为从句时，问句部分的主语一般用it代替，如：
①What he said is true, isn't it? （不用didn’t he?）
②Where we will build the dam has not been decided yet, has it? （不用won’t
we?）
22.陈述部分的主语为动名词或不定式时，问句的主语用it代替。如：
①To do one good deed is easy for a person, isn't it?②Skating is your favorite
sport, isn't it?
23.陈述部分的主语是不定代词 one，反义疑问句的主语可以用 one，也可以用 you。如：
One should be ready to help others, shuldn’t one?
▲选择疑问句：提出两种或两种以上情况,需要对方作出选择回答的疑问句叫选择疑问
句。
541) 构成：(1) 一般疑问句 + or + 第二选项？
(2) 特殊疑问句 + 第一选项(+ 第二选项)+ or + 第三选项？
2)选择疑问句的结构与特殊疑问句相同,即要具体回答,不可以用yes / no回答。如：
Is your friend a boy or a girl? –A girl. (----你的朋友是男孩还是女孩？----是女孩。) /
Which do you prefer, coffee or tea? –Tea, please. (---你要哪一样咖啡还是茶？----请来
茶吧。) / Which do you like best, singing, dancing or skating? --Dancing, of course. (-
---唱歌、跳舞和溜冰你最喜欢哪样？----当然是跳舞啦！)
5、祈使句：祈使句用来表示请求、命令等。它的主语you往往不说出。
▲祈使句的肯定式： 动词(原形) + 其他 如：Please give me a hand. (请帮忙) / Shut up!
(住嘴！)
▲祈使句的否定式： Don’t +动词原形 + 其他 如：Please don’t talk in low voices. (请
不要低声讲话。) / Don’t look back! (不要掉头看。)
[注意] 以“let’s”引出的祈使句的否定结构,“not”应放在“let’s”后面。如：Let’s not
trouble him. (我们不要打扰他。)
肯定祈使句前可以用助动词来加强语气。如：Please do help me! (请千万帮帮我。)
6、感叹句：感叹句用来表示喜怒哀乐等强烈感情。句末常用“！”
▲对含有形容词的名词短语感叹的结构通常是：
What + (a /an) + (形容词) +名词+ 陈述句结构(主谓语) ,用来强调句子中的名词,如：
What a good, kind girl (she is)! (她是多么善良的好女孩！) / What bad weather (it is)!
(天气真糟糕！)
▲仅对形容词或副词进行感叹的结构通常是：How + 形容词/副词 + 陈述句结构(主谓
语) ,用来强调句子中的形容词、副词或动词。How carefully the old man walks! (这老
人走路真小心！) / How delicious the food is! (这食品真好吃！) / How beautiful! (真美
呀！)
▲有时,陈述句、祈使句、疑问句、一个词或词组,也带有一定的感情色彩,也可以成为感
叹句,此时未必使用感叹句型。He is sitting on a tiger’s back! (他坐在老虎的背上！) / A
nice shot! (漂亮一击！) / Good goal! (好球！)
7、简单句的物种基本句型
句子包含主要句子成分(主语、谓语)和次要句子成分(表语、宾语、宾语补足语),按照动
词的性质将英语简单句划分为以下五种基本句型：
1、基本句型的词序： 2、划分符号(没有统一规定,仅供参考)：
主谓句型：S－V
i。 主语： 定语：( )
主系表句型：S－V －P
link 谓语： 状语：[ ]
主谓宾句型：S－V －O
t. 宾语： 宾补：〈 〉
主谓双宾句型：S－V
t
－O
间宾
－O
直宾 表语：
主谓宾补句型：S－V－O－C
t
3、例句：Jim is working [very hard] [now].（他现在正非常努力地工作。）
She is young. （她年轻。） It looks like rain. （天看上去要下雨。）
The boy [always] kicked the dog [with his feet]. （这男孩老是用脚踢那只狗。）
He has [never] bought me a toy [since last year]. （从去年起他没给我买过一
个玩具。）
He felt something (cold) .（他感到有个冰冷的东西顺着腿
上爬。）
4、英语词类与句子成分关系图：
55句 子 成 分 宾语
主语* 谓语 宾语* 表语* 定语* 状语*
词类或短语 补足语
名词 √√√ × √√√ √√ √ × √
代词 √√√ × √√√ √√ √√ × ×
形容词 × × × √√√ √√√ × √√
数词 √ × √ √ √√√ × √
时态语态形式 × √√√ × × × × ×
动 动词不定式 √√ × √√ √ √ √√ √√√
动名词 √√ × √√√ √ √ × ×
动词现在分词 × × × √ √ √√ √√√
词
动词过去分词 × × × √ √ √√ √√
副词 × × × √ √ √√√ √
介词短语 × × × √√ √ √√ √
[注释] 1、“√”表示某种词类可以充当某个成分, “√√”表示某种词类经常充当某个成
分, “√√√”表示某种词类最经常充当某个成分。 “×”表示某种词类不能
充当某个成分。
2、“ * ”表示该成分可以由从句充当,如主语从句、宾语从句、状语从句等。
第十一章 并列句、主从复合句
一、并列句
1、基本概念：
并列复合句是由两个或两个以上并列而又独立的简单句构成。两个简单句常由并列
连接词连在一起；但有时不用连接词,只在两个简单句之间用一逗号或分号。
2、常见的并列句：
(1) 用来连接两个并列概念的连接词有 and , not only…but also…, neither…nor…
等,and所连接的前后分句往往表示先后关系、递进关系。前后分句的时态往往保持
一致关系,若第一个分句是祈使句,那么第二个分句用将来时。
(2) 表示在两者之间选择一个, 常用的连接词有or,otherwise,or else,either…or…等,前
后分句的时态往往保持一致关系,若第一个分句是祈使句,那么第二个分句用将来时。
(3) 表明两个概念彼此有矛盾、相反或者转折, 常用的连接词有 but,yet,still ,however
等,前后分句时态一致。
(4) 说明原因, 用连接词for ,前后分句时态一致。
(5) 表示结果,用连接词so, 前后分句时态一致。
二、主从复合句
1、概念：
主从复合句由一个主句和一个或一个以上的从句构成。主句为句子的主体,从句只用
作句子的一个次要成分,不能独立成为一个句子。从句通常由关联词引导,并由关联词
将从句和主句联系在一起。如：While the grandparents love the children, they are strict
with them.(爷爷奶奶们很爱孩子,同时对他们也严格要求。) / It seemed as if the meeting
would never end.(看起来会议没完没了。) / Hurry up, or (else) you'll be late.(快点, 要
不然就来不及了。) / However I cook eggs, the child still refuses to eat them.(不管我用
什么方法煮鸡蛋,小孩还是不肯吃。)
2、分类：
从句按其在复合句中的作用,分为主语从句、表语从句、宾语从句、定语从句和状语
从句等。（参见以下各条）
3、各从句在句子中的位置以及用法：
56(1) 表语从句：在句子中作连系动词的表语的从句,它位于主句中的系动词之后。
例如：That is why he did not come to school yesterday. / It is because you are so clever.
(2) 宾语从句：在句子中作及物动词或介词的宾语。
①基本形式：（主句＋）连词+从句主语+从句谓语+...
② 关于宾语从句连词的选择：
若从句来源于一个陈述句,那么,连词用that,在口语中that可以省略;
若从句来源于一个一般疑问句,连词则用if 或whether;
若从句来源于一个特殊疑问句,则连词就是疑问词(如what,who,where,when等)
例如：They believe that the computer will finally take the place of human beings.(他
们相信计算机终将代替人类。) (从句本来就是陈述句)/ I wonder whether I
should say something for him to the headmaster. (我不知道是不是该为他在校长
跟前说点什么。) (从句来源于一般问句 Shall I say something for him to the
headmaster?) / He asked me where he could get such medicine. (他问我在哪儿能
搞到那样的药。) (从句来源于特殊问句Where can he get such medicine? )
③ 宾语从句的时态问题：如果主句是现在时,从句则用现在某一时态,甚至可以用
过去时；
如主句是过去时,从句则相应地使用过去某一时态,遇到客观真理时仍然用现
在时。如：I think I will do better in English this term. (我想本学期我的英语会
学得好点。) / The teacher asked the boy if the earth is round. (老师问那个男孩
地球是不是圆的。)
④ 下列结构后面的从句一般也作为宾语从句看待：
be sorry / afraid / sure / glad +that从句,如：I’m sorry I’m late. (对不起,我迟到
了。) / I’m afraid he isn’t in at the moment. (恐怕他此刻不在家。)
(3) 状语从句：在复合句中作状语,其位置可以在主句前或主句后。状语从句可以分为时
间、地点、原因、目的、结果、比较、让步、条件等几种。状语从句由从属连
接词引导。
时间状语从句通常由when ,as ,while, after, before, since, as soon as ,since, till (until),
while, whenever 等引导。时间状语从句一般放在句首或句尾,特别注意,时间状
语从句不允许使用将来时,而应该用现在时替代。如： When you finish the work,
you may go out to play with Sam. (你完成工作就可以出去和Jim一起玩了。) / I
won’t leave until Mum comes back. (妈妈回来了我才会走。)
地点状语从句通常由 where, wherever等引导。如：Go back where you came from!
(哪里来还滚到哪里去！) / I will never forget to catch the thief who stole my
necklace wherever he may be. (我永远也不会忘记去抓住那个偷我项链的贼,无论
他会在哪里。)
原因状语从句通常由because, since, as等引导,一般放在句首或句尾。如：He went
abroad because his father had found a good university for him. (他出国了,因为他
父亲给他找了一所好大学。)
目的状语从句通常由so that..., so...hat..., in order that... 等引导,往往放在句尾,从句
中通常含有can / could / may / might等情态动词。如：He got up earlier so that
he could catch the first train. (他起身更早为的是赶上第一班车。)
结果状语从句通常由 so that..., so...that... 等引导,放在句尾。结果状语从句一般表
示已经发生的事情,故多为过去时态。如：He lost so many bikes that he decided
never to buy a new one. (他丢了那么多辆自行车,他决定再也不买新车了。)
比较状语从句通常由as, than, as (so)...as等引导,一般省略从句的谓语部分,只剩下
名词或代词(用主格或宾格均可)。如：Jane is much taller than I/me. (Jane比我
高多了。) / I don’t have as many books as you (do). (我书没有你多)
让步状语从句通常由though (although), as, even if( even though), however, whatever
等引导。如：Even if you pay the debt(债务) for me, I will not thank you because
it has nothing to do with me. (即使你替我还了债我也不会感谢你,因为它与我毫
57无关系。) / He wears a T-shirt though it is very cold. (他穿了一件T恤衫,尽管天
很冷。)
条件状语从句通常由if, unless, as long as等引导,条件状语从句一般放在句首或句
尾,特别注意,时间状语从句不允许使用将来时,而应该用现在时替代。You will
certainly fail in the coming final exams unless you work much harder. (即将来到
的期末考试你肯定考不及格,除非你更用功。) / If it doesn’ t rain tomorrow, we
shall go hiking. (如果明天不下雨我们就要去徒步旅行。)
[注意] 1、because与so；(al)though与but；if与so不可以同在一个句子中成对出
现。
2、时间、条件、原因,让步状语从句放在句首时需要用逗号与主句隔开。
(4) 定语从句：在复合句中作定语用修饰句子中某一名词或代词的从句叫定语从句。
① 定语从句的位置：放在名词或代词的后面。如：The man who has an umbrella in
his hand is my uncle. (手上抓了一把雨伞的人是我的叔叔。)
② 语法术语的改变：被修饰的名词或代词称为先行词；引导定语从句的连接词称
为关系词,其中that、which、who称为关系代词,where、when、how称为关系
副词。
③ 关系代词或关系副词的作用：
关系代词who、whom 和whose指人,分别在从句中作主语、宾语和定语。which
指物 that 多指物, 有时也指人,它们在从句中可以作主语或宾语。定语从句中
关系代词作从句宾语时可以省略。This is the thief (that/who/whom) we have been
looking for these days. (这个就是我们近日一直在找的小偷。) / Please find a room
which is big enough for all of us to live in. (请找一间足够大能住下我们全体的
房间。)
关系副词 when 或 where 引导定语从句时,它们在从句中分别作时间状语和地点
状语。如：This is the room where they had a quarrel a week ago. (这是一个星期
前他们吵架的房间。) / I can never forget the day when I first saw you. (我永远
不会忘记第一次见到你的日子。)
④ 限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句。限制性定语从句在句中不能省略,否则主
句意思就不完整。非限制性定语从句和主句之间往往用逗号分开,这种从句是
一种附加说明,如果从句子中省去,也不致于影响主句的意思。如：She spent the
whole evening talking about her latest book, which none of us had heard of. (她
一个晚上都在谈论她最近的书,我们一个人都没有听说过那本书。)
[注解]
1、关系代词只能用that的情况：当先行词是指事物的不定代词(all, anything等),或
先行词部分含有最高级,或含有序数词时,不能用其他的关系代词,只能用 that.
如：All that Lily told me seems untrue. (Lily告诉我的话似乎不真实。) / Can you
give me anything that has no sugar inside? (能不能给我点里面没有糖的东西？)
/ This is the first two-story bus that runs in our city. (这是第一辆运行于我市的双
层公交车。)
2、关系代词在从句中作主语时一般用who(指人)、that(指物),而不用that指人或用
which指物。 如：Do you know the woman who is weeping in the corner? (你认
识那个在角落里哭泣的女人吗？) / Do not tell me any words that have nothing to
do with me. (跟我无关的话,请一个字也不要说。)
3、关系代词作从句的宾语时,常用 which 或 whom,较少使用 that 或 who,而且,关系
代词常常省略。如：Tom’s father was the first parent whom our teacher talked to.
(Tom的父亲是我们老师第一个谈话的人。)
4、当关系代词紧跟在介词后面时,必须用which或whom,而当介词移到句尾时,则又
可以使用that或who. 如：This is the room in which Miss Li once lived. (= This
is the room Miss Li once lived in.) (这是李小姐曾经居住过的房间。)
(5) 主语从句：在句子中充当句子主语的从句叫主语从句。位于谓语动词之前。通常
58由 that,whether 以及疑问连词引导。一般情况下,常用 it 替代主语从句,而将主语
从句移到句尾。如：When we should start is still a question. (我们该在什么时候开
始还是个问题呢。)
第十二章 直接引语和间接引语(初中不作特别要求)
1、直接引语和间接引语：在陈述句中,直接引用说话人原来的语句,称为直接引语。在书写时,
直接引语用引号。用自己的词语来转述表达原来说话人说的内容,称为间接引语。
2、直接引语改变为间接引语：
1、直接引语如果是陈述句,变为间接引语时应注意以下各点：
①不用引号,而用连接词that,但有时可省略。
②人称作相应变化；
③主句里的动词如果是过去时,间接引语中的时态一般应作相应改变： 一般现在时变
一般过去时；一般将来时变过去将来时；现在进行时变过去进行时；现在完成时变
成过去完成时；一般过去时变成过去完成时；但一般过去时如与一个具体的过去时
间连用,则时态不变。
如：He says,"I am not from the USA.”→He says that he is not from the USA.
Mr Smith said to his girl friend,“ I haven’ t seen you for a long time.”
→Mr Smith said to his girl friend that he had not seen her for a long time.
2、直接引语如果是一般疑问句,变为间接引语时,需用从属连接词 whether 或 if 引导,词
序要改变。如：Lin Tao said to Miss Green, "Is it made in China?” →Lin Tao asked
Miss Green if it was made in China.
3、直接引语如果是特殊疑问句,变为间接引语时,需用疑问词引导,词序是：连词+主语+
谓语。
如：Lucy said to me, “How can I help?” →Lucy asked me how she could help.
4、直接引语如是祈使句,变间接引语时,须将祈使句变为动词不定式,并在动词不定式前
用tell, ask, order. 如：He said to the little boy,“ Come here, young man! ”
→He asked the little boy to go there.
5、直接引语变为间接引语时,指示代词以及表示时间和地点的词或词组应作相应变化：
在直接引语中 在间接引语中
this that
these those
now then
ago before
today that day
this week(month,etc.) that week ( month,etc.)
next week ( month,etc.) the next week ( month,etc.)
yesterday the day before
tomorrow the next (following) day
here there
第十三章 主谓一致
59一.概念:
主谓一致是指：
1） 语法形式上要一致，即单复数形式与谓语要一致。
2） 意义上要一致，即主语意义上的单复数要与谓语的单复数形式一致。
3） 就近原则，即谓语动词的单复形式取决于最靠近它的词语，
一般来说，不可数名词用动词单数，可数名词复数用动词复数。例如：
There is much water in the thermos.
但当不可数名词前有表示数量的复数名词时，谓语动词用复数形式。例如：
Ten thousand tons of coal were produced last year.
二.相关知识点精讲
1.并列结构作主语时谓语用复数，例如：
Reading and writing are very important. 读写很重要。
注意：当主语由and连结时，如果它表示一个单一的概念，即指同一人或同一物时，谓
语动词用单数，and 此时连接的两个词前只有一个冠词。例如：
The iron and steel industry is very important to our life. 钢铁工业对我们的
生活有重要意义。
典型例题
The League secretary and monitor ___ asked to make a speech at the meeting.
A. is B. was C. are D. were
答案B. 注： 先从时态上考虑。这是过去发生的事情应用过去时，先排除A.，C。
本题易误选D，因为The League secretary and monitor 好象是两个人，但仔细辨别，
monitor 前没有the，在英语中，当一人兼数职时只在第一个职务前加定冠词。后面的职务
用and 相连。这样本题主语为一个人，所以应选B。
2. 主谓一致中的靠近原则
1)当there be 句型的主语是一系列事物时，谓语应与最邻近的主语保持一致。例如：
There is a pen, a knife and several books on the desk. 桌上有一支笔、一把小刀
和几本书。
There are twenty boy-students and twenty-three girl-students in the class.班
上有二十个男孩，二十三个女孩。
2）当either… or… 与neither… nor，连接两个主语时，谓语动词与最邻近的主语保持
一致。如果句子是由here, there引导，而主语又不止一个时，谓语通常也和最邻近的主语
一致。例如：
Either you or she is to go. 不是你去，就是她去。
Here is a pen, a few envelops and some paper for you. 给你笔、信封和纸。
3.谓语动词与前面的主语一致
当主语有with, together with, like, except, but, no less than, as well as 等词组
成的短语时，谓语动词与前面的主语部分一致。例如：
The teacher together with some students is visiting the factory. 教师和一些
学生在参观工厂。
He as well as I wants to go boating.他和我想去划船。
4. 谓语需用单数的情况
1）代词each以及由every, some, no, any等构成的复合代词作主语时，或主语中含有
each, every时, 谓语需用单数。例如：
Each of us has a tape-recorder. 我们每人都有录音机。
60There is something wrong with my watch. 我的表坏了。
2）当主语是一本书或一条格言时，谓语动词常用单数。例如：
The Arabian Night is a book known to lovers of English. 《天方夜谭》是英语
爱好者熟悉的一本书。
3）表示金钱，时间，价格或度量衡的复合名词作主语时，通常把这些名词看作一个整体，
谓语一般用单数。例如：
Three weeks was allowed for making the necessary preparations. 用三个星期
来做准备。
Ten yuan is enough. 十元够了。
5.指代意义决定谓语的单复数
1）代词what, which, who, none, some, any, more, most, all等词的单复数由其指
代的词的单复数决定。例如：
All is right. 一切顺利。
All are present. 人都到齐了。
2）集体名词作主语时，谓语的数要根据主语的意思来决定。如family, audience, crew,
crowd, class, company, committee等词后，谓语动词用复数形式时强调这个集体中的
各个成员，用单数时强调该集体的整体。例如：
His family isn't very large. 他家成员不多。
His family are music lovers. 他家个个都是音乐爱好者。
但集合名词people, police, cattle, poultry等在任何情况下都用复数形式。例如：
Are there any police around? 附近有警察吗？
3）有些名词，如variety, number, population, proportion, majority 等有时看作单数，
有时看作复数。例如：
A number of +名词复数+复数动词。
The number of +名词复数+单数动词。
A number of books have lent out.
The majority of the students like English.
6.与后接名词或代词保持一致的情况
1）用half of, most of, none of, heaps of, lots of, plenty of 等引起主语时，谓语
动词通常与of后面的名词/代词保持一致。例如：
Most of his money is spent on books. 他大部分的钱化在书上了。
Most of the students are taking an active part in sports. 大部分学生积极参
与体育运动。
2）用a portion of, a series of, a pile of, a panel of 等引起主语时，谓语动词通
常用单数。例如： A series of accidents has been reported. 媒体报道了一连串的事
故。
A pile of lots was set beside the hearth. 炉边有一堆木柴。
3）如 many a 或 more than one 所修饰的短语作主语时，谓语动词多用单数形式。但由
more than… of 作主语时，动词应与其后的名词或代词保持一致。例如：
Many a person has read the novel. 许多人读过这本书。
More than 60 percent of the students are from the city.百分之六十多的学生
来自这个城市。
三.巩固练习
（ ） 1. The number of people invited ______ fifty, but a number of them
61_______ absent for different reasons.
A. were, was B. was, was
C. was, were D. were, were
（ ） 2. E-mail, as well as telephones, ________ an important part in daily
communication.
A. is playing B. have played
C. are playing D. play
（ ） 3. ______ of the land in that district ______ covered with trees and
grass.
A. Two fifth, is B. Two fifth, are
C. Two fifths, is D. Two fifths, are
（ ） 4. Ten minutes ______ a long time for one who waits.
A. seem B. seems
C. seemed D. are seemed
（ ） 5. Eric is the only one of the boys who _____ a driving license.
A. has B. have
C. is having D. are having’
（ ） 6. Joy and Sorrow _____ next-door neighbours.
A. is B. are C. were D. be
（ ）7. In my opinion, some of the news _____ unbelievable.
A. are B. is C. has been D. have been
（ ）8. When ______ the United Nations founded?
A. is B. are C. was D. were
（ ）9. Every possible means _____ .
A. has tried B. has been tried
C. was tried D. were tried
（ ） 10. What she says and does _____ nothing to do with me.
A. was B. were C. has D. have
（ ）11. There _____ a dictionary and several books on the desk.
A. are B. must C. have been D. is
（ ）12. Nobody ______ seen the film. It’s a pity.
A. but Tom and Jack have B. except Tom and Jack have
C. but my friends has D. but I have
（ ）13. No teacher and no student ______．
A. are admitted B. is admitted
C. are admitting D. is admitting
（ ）14. All but one ______ here just now.
A. is B. was C. has been D. were
（ ）15. When and where to build the new factory _____ yet.
A. is not decided B. are not decided
C. has not decided D. have not decided
（ ） 16. The writer and singer ______ here.
A. is B. are C. were D. do
62（ ） 17. As I have a meeting at four, ten minutes _____ all that I can spare
to talk with you.
A. are B. was C. is D. were
（ ） 18. In those days John with his classmates _____ kept busy preparing
for the exam.
A. is B. are
C. was D. were
（ ） 19. —— ____ your clothes?
——No, mine _____ hanging over there.
A. Is it, is B. Are these, are
C. Is it, are D. Are these, is
（ ） 20. The Smith’s family, which ____ rather a large one, ____ very fond
of their old houses.
A. were, were B. was, was
C. were, was D. was, were
（ ） 21. What the teacher and the students want to say _____ that either of
the countries ____ beautiful.
A. are, are B. is, is
C. are, is D. is, are
（ ） 22. He is the only one of the students who _____ a winner of scholarship
for three years.
A. is B. are
C. have been D. has been
（ ） 23. _____ of my brothers are reporters. Covering events, meetings, or
sports meetings ______ their duty.
A. Each, are B. Both, is
C. Neither, are D. None, is
（ ） 24. —— What do you think of the ______ of the coat?
—— It’s rather high. You can buy a cheaper one in that shop.
A. value B. cost C. price D. use
（ ） 25. —— Are the two answers correct?
—— No, ______ correct.
A. no one is B. both are not
C. neither is D. either is not
（ ） 26. The wind, together with rain and fog, _____ making sailing
difficult.
A. have been B. was
C. / D/ are
四.答案
1.C 2. A 3. C 4. B 5. A 6. B 7. B 8. C 9. B 10. C 11. D
12. C 13. B 14. D 15. A 16. A 17. C 18. C 19. B 20. D 21. B
22. D 23. B 24. C 25. C 26. B
第十四章 动词的时态
63概念:
时态是英语谓语动词的一种形式,表示动作发生的时间和所处的状态.英语中的时态是
通过动词形式本身的变化来实现的.英语有16种时态,但中学阶段较常用的有十种:一般
现在时,一般过去时,一般将来时,过去将来时,现在进行时,过去进行时,将来进行时,过
去完成时,英在完成时和现在完成进行时.
相关知识点精讲
1.一般现在时的用法
1） 经常性或习惯性的动作，常与表示频腮度的时间状语连用。时间状语： every…,
sometimes, at…, on Sunday。例如：
I leave home for school at 7 every morning. 每天早上我七点离开家。
2） 客观真理，客观存在，科学事实。例如：
The earth moves around the sun. 地球绕太阳转动。
Shanghai lies in the east of China. 上海位于中国东部。
3） 表示格言或警句。例如：
Pride goes before a fall. 骄者必败。
注意：此用法如果出现在宾语从句中，即使主句是过去时，从句谓语也要用一般现在
时。
例：Columbus proved that the earth is round. 哥伦布证实了地球是圆的。
4） 现在时刻的状态、能力、性格、个性。例如：
I don't want so much. 我不要那么多。
Ann writes good English but does not speak well. 安英语写得不错，讲的可不
行。
比较：Now I put the sugar in the cup. 把糖放入杯子。
I am doing my homework now. 我正在做功课。
第一句用一般现在时，用于操作演示或指导说明的示范性动作，表示言行的瞬间动作。
第二句中的now是进行时的标志，表示正在进行的动作的客观状况，所以后句用一般现
在时。
2. 一般过去时的用法
1）在确定的过去时间里所发生的动作或存在的状态。例如：时间状语有：yesterday, last
week, an hour ago, the other day, in 1982等。例如：
Where did you go just now? 刚才你上哪儿去了？
2）表示在过去一段时间内，经常性或习惯性的动作。例如：
When I was a child, I often played football in the street. 我是个孩子的时
候，常在马路上踢足球。
Whenever the Browns went during their visit, they were given a warm welcome.
那时，布朗一家无论什么时候去，都受到热烈欢迎。
3）句型：It is time for sb. to do sth "到……时间了" "该……了"。例如：
It is time for you to go to bed. 你该睡觉了。
It is time that sb. did sth. "时间已迟了" "早该……了" ，例如It
is time you went to bed. 你早该睡觉了。
would （had） rather sb. did sth. 表示'宁愿某人做某事'。例如：I'd
rather you came tomorrow.还是明天来吧。
4） wish, wonder, think, hope 等用过去时，作试探性的询问、请求、建议等，而一般过
去时表示的动作或状态都已成为过去，现已不复存在。例如：I thought you might have
64免费学习资源公众号：贩梦笠翁 资源于勿商用网络侵删
some. 我以为你想要一些。
比较：Christine was an invalid all her life.（含义：她已不在人间。）
Christine has been an invalid all her life.（含义：她现在还活着）
Mrs. Darby lived in Kentucky for seven years. （含义：达比太太已不再
住在肯塔基州。）
Mrs. Darby has lived in Kentucky for seven years. （含义：现在还住在
肯塔基州，有可能指刚离去）
注意： 用过去时表示现在，表示委婉语气。
1）动词want, hope, wonder, think, intend 等。例如：
Did you want anything else? 您还要些什么吗？
I wondered if you could help me. 能不能帮我一下。
2）情态动词 could, would。例如：
Could you lend me your bike? 你的自行车，能借用一些吗？
3.一般将来时
1） shall用于第一人称，常被will 所代替。will 在陈述句中用于各人称，在征求意
见时常用于第二人称。例如：
Which paragraph shall I read first？ 我先读哪一段呢？
Will you be at home at seven this evening? 今晚七点回家好吗？
2） be going to +不定式，表示将来。
a. 主语的意图，即将做某事。例如：What are you going to do tomorrow? 明天
打算作什么呢？
b. 计划，安排要发生的事。例如：The play is going to be produced next month。
这出戏下月开播。
c. 有迹象要发生的事。例如：Look at the dark clouds, there is going to be
a storm. 看那乌云，快要下雨了。
3） be +不定式表将来，按计划或正式安排将发生的事。例如：
We are to discuss the report next Saturday.我们下星期六讨论这份报告。
4） be about to +不定式，意为马上做某事。例如：
He is about to leave for Beijing. 他马上要去北京。
注意：be about to do 不能与tomorrow, next week 等表示明确将来时的时间状语连
用。
4. 一般现在时表将来
1）下列动词come, go, arrive, leave, start, begin, return的一般现在时可以表示将
来，主要用来表示在时间上已确定或安排好的事情。例如：
The train leaves at six tomorrow morning. 火车明天上午六点开。
When does the bus star? It stars in ten minutes. 汽车什么时候开？十分钟
后。
2）以here, there等开始的倒装句，表示动作正在进行。例如：
Here comes the bus. = The bus is coming. 车来了。
There goes the bell. = The bell is ringing. 铃响了。
3）在时间或条件句中。例如：
When Bill comes （不是will come）, ask him to wait for me. 比尔来后，让
他等我。
I'll write to you as soon as I arrive there. 我到了那里，就写信给你。
654）在动词hope, take care that, make sure that等的宾语从句中。例如：
I hope they have a nice time next week. 我希望他们下星期玩得开心。
Make sure that the windows are closed before you leave the room. 离开房
间前，务必把窗户关了。
5. 用现在进行时表示将来
下列动词come, go, arrive, leave, start, begin, return等现在进行时可以表示将
来。例如：
I'm leaving tomorrow. 明天我要走了。
Are you staying here till next week? 你会在这儿呆到下周吗？
6. 现在完成时
现在完成时用来表示之前已发生或完成的动作或状态，其结果的影响现在还存在；也可
表示持续到现在的动作或状态。其构成：have （has） +过去分词。
7. 比较一般过去时与现在完成时
1）一般过去时表示过去某时发生的动作或单纯叙述过去的事情，强调动作；现在完成时为
过去发生的，强调过去的事情对现在的影响，强调的是影响。
2）一般过去时常与具体的时间状语连用，而现在完成时通常与模糊的时间状语连用，
或无时间状语。
一般过去时的时间状语：yesterday, last week，…ago, in1980, in October, just
now等，皆为具体的时间状语。
现在完成时的时间状语：for, since, so far, ever, never, just, yet, till/until, up
to now, in past years, always等，皆不确定的时间状语。
共同的时间状语：this morning, tonight, this April, now, already, recently,
lately 等。
3）现在完成时可表示持续到现在的动作或状态，动词一般是延续性的，如live, teach,
learn, work, study, know.。
一般过去时常用的非持续性动词有come, go, leave, start, die, finish, become,
get married等。例如：
I saw this film yesterday. （强调看的动作发生过了）
I have seen this film. （强调对现在的影响，电影的内容已经知道了）
Why did you get up so early? （强调起床的动作已发生过了）
Who hasn't handed in his paper? （强调有卷子未交，疑为不公平竞争）
He has been in the League for three years. （在团内的状态可延续）
He has been a League member for three years. （是团员的状态可持续）
句子中如有过去时的时间副词（如yesterday, last, week, in 1960）时，不能使
用现在完成时，要用过去时。
（错）Tom has written a letter to his parents last night.
（对）Tom wrote a letter to his parents last night.
8. 用于现在完成时的句型
1）It is the first / second time.... that…结构中的从句部分，用现在完成时。例
如：
It is the first time that I have visited the city. 这是我第一次访问这城市。
This is the first time （that） I've heard him sing. 这是我第一次听他唱歌。
注意：It was the third time that the boy had been late.
2）This is +形容词最高级+that…结构，that 从句要用现在完成时。例如：
66This is the best film that I've （ever） seen. 这是我看过的最好的电影。
9.过去完成时
1） 概念：表示过去的过去
----|----------|--------|----> 其构成是had +过去分词构成。
那时以前 那时 现在
2） 用法
a. 在told, said, knew, heard, thought等动词后的宾语从句。例如：
She said （that）she had never been to Paris. 她告诉我她曾去过巴黎。
b. 状语从句
在过去不同时间发生的两个动作中，发生在先，用过去完成时；发生在后，用一般
过去时。例如：
When the police arrived, the thieves had run away. 警察到达时，小偷们早
就跑了。
c. 表示意向的动词，如hope, wish, expect, think, intend, mean, suppose等，
用过去完成时表示"原本…，未能…"。例如：
We had hoped that you would come, but you didn't. 那时我们希望你能来，
但是你没有来。
3） 过去完成时的时间状语before, by, until , when, after, once, as soon as。
例如：
He said that he had learned some English before. 他说过他以前学过一些英
语。
By the time he was twelve, Edison had began to make a living by himself.
到了十二岁那年，爱迪生开始自己谋生。
Tom was disappointed that most of the guests had left when he arrived
at the party.
汤姆失望了，因为他到达晚会时，大部分客人已经走了。
10. 用一般过去时代替过去完成时
1） 两个动作如按顺序发生，又不强调先后，或用then，and，but 等连词时，多用一般
过去时。例如：
When she saw the mouse，she screamed. 她看到老鼠，就叫了起来。
My aunt gave me a hat and I lost it. 姑妈给了我一顶帽子，我把它丢了。
2 ） 两个动作相继发生，可用一般过去时；如第一个动作需要若干时间完成，用过去完
成时。例如：
When I heard the news, I was very excited.
3） 叙述历史事实，可不用过去完成时，而只用一般过去时。例如：
Our teacher told us that Columbus discovered America in 1492.
11.将来完成时
1） 构成will have done
2） 概念
a. 状态完成：表示某事继续到将来某一时为止一直有的状态。例如：
They will have been married for 20 years by then. 到那时他们结婚将有二十年
了。
b. 动作完成：表示将来某一时或另一个将来的动作之前，已经完成的动作或获得的经
验。例如：
67You will have reached Shanghai by this time tomorrow. 明天此时，你已经到
达上海了
12.现在进行时
现在进行时的基本用法：
a. 表示现在（指说话人说话时）正在发生的事情。例如：
We are waiting for you. 我们正在等你。
b. 习惯进行：表示长期的或重复性的动作，说话时动作未必正在进行。例如：
Mr. Green is writing another novel. 他在写另一部小说。（说话时并未在写，
只处于写作的状态。）
c. 表示渐变，这样的动词有：get, grow, become, turn, run, go, begin等。例如：
The leaves are turning red. 叶子在变红。
It's getting warmer and warmer. 天越来越热了。
d. 与always, constantly, forever 等词连用，表示反复发生的动作或持续存在的状
态，往往带有说话人的主观色彩。例如：
You are always changing your mind. 你老是改变主意。
13. 过去进行时
1）概念：表示过去某时正在进行的状态或动作。
2）过去进行时的主要用法是描述一件事发生的背景；一个长动作延续的时候，另一个短
动作发生。
3） 常用的时间状语有this morning, the whole morning, all day yesterday, from
nine to ten last evening, when, while等。例如：
My brother fell while he was riding his bicycle and hurt himself. 我兄弟
骑车时摔了下来，受了伤。
It was raining when they left the station. 他们离开车站时，正下着雨。
When I got to the top of the mountain, the sun was shining. 我到达山顶时，
阳光灿烂。
14. 将来进行时
1） 概念：表示将来某时进行的状态或动作，或按预测将来会发生的事情。例如：
She'll be coming soon. 她会很快来的。
I'll be meeting him sometime in the future. 将来我一定去见他。
注意：将来进行时不用于表示"意志"，不能说 I'll be having a talk with her.
2）常用的时间状语有soon, tomorrow, this evening，on Sunday, by this time，tomorrow,
in two days, tomorrow evening等。例如：By this time tomorrow, I'll be lying
on the beach. 明天此时，我正躺在海滩上呢。
15. 一般现在时代替一般将来时
When, while, before, after, till, once, as soon as, so long as, by the time, if,
in case （that）, unless, even if, whether, the moment, the minute, the day, the
year, immediately 等引导的时间状语从句，条件句中，用一般现在时代替将来时。例如：
He is going to visit her aunt the day he arrives in Beijing. 他一到北京，就
去看他姨妈。
16. 一般现在时代替一般过去时
1 ） "书上说"，"报纸上说"等。例如：
The newspaper says that it's going to be cold tomorrow. 报纸上说明天会很
冷的。
682） 叙述往事，使其生动。例如：
Napoleon's army now advances and the great battle begins.拿破仑的军队正在
向前挺进，大战开始了
17. 一般现在时代替现在完成时
1） 有些动词用一般现在时代替完成时，如hear, tell, learn, write , understand,
forget, know, find , say, remember等。例如：
I hear （= have heard） he will go to London. 我听说了他将去伦敦。
I forget （=have forgotten） how old he is. 我忘了他多大了。
2） 用句型 " It is … since…"代替"It has been … since …"。例如：
It is （= has been） five years since we last met. 从我们上次见面以来，五年
过去了。
18. 一般现在时代替现在进行时。
在Here comes…/There goes…等句型里，用一般现在时代替现在进行时。例如：
There goes the bell. 铃响了。
19. 现在进行时代替将来时
1） 表示即将发生的或预定中计划好的活动。例如：
Are you staying with us this weekend? 和我们一起度周末好吗?
We are leaving soon. 我们马上就走。
2） 渐变动词，如get, run, grow, become, begin以及瞬间动词die等。例如：
He is dying. 他要死了。
20.时态一致
1） 如果从句所叙述的为真理或相对不变的事实，则用现在时。例如：
At that time, people did not know that the earth moves. 那时，人们不知道地
球是动的。
He told me last week that he is eighteen. 上星期他告诉我他十八岁了。
2） 宾语从句中的，助动词ought, need, must, dare 的时态是不变的。例如：
He thought that I need not tell you the truth. 他认为我不必告诉你真相。
三.巩固练习:
1、I’ ll give the book to him as soon as he ________ back.
2、Has the baby ________ crying yet? (stop)
3、I don’ t know whether Mother __________ me to Beijing next month.(take)
4、She _______ on her coat and went out. (put)
5、 “What are they doing?” “They __________ ready for the sports meeting.”
(get)
6、The boy asked his mother ________him go and play basketball.(let)
7、I’m sorry to keep you ____________ for a long time. (wait)
8、It ________ (take) him half an hour _______ (finish) his homework yesterday.
9、If it ________ an interesting film, we’ll see it tomorrow. (be)
10、They usually ________ (do) their homework after supper.
6911、Listen! Who _____________(sing) in the next room now?
12、__________(be) your parents in Shanghai last year?
13、Mr. Yu _____________(teach) us maths since 1982.
14、They will have a trip to the Great Wall if it _________ (not rain) tomorrow.
15、Li Ming often _________ (listen) to the radio in the morning.
16、A: “Father, may I go out and play football?” B: “_____you ____(do) your
homework?”
17 、 All the people in the town are glad ______(hear) that a famous
musician ___ a concert this Saturday evening.( give)
18、Our teacher told us if it _____(not snow) we would visit the Science Museum
the next day.
19、They often _______ (play) football in the afternoon.
20、A: What’re you doing Dad? B: I _______ (mend) the radio.
21、Let’s _______(carry) the boxes to the house.
22、Yesterday she ______ (want) very much to see the film, but she couldn’
t __(get) a ticket.
23、I _________(write) to you as soon as I get to Shanghai.
24、Mike ___________(visit) several places since he came to Beijing.
25、He ___________ (write) four letters to his wife every month.
26、Don’ t make any noise, Grandma ___________ (sleep).
27、His aunt ___________ (do) some cooking when he came in .
28、When they ___________ (reach) the station, the train had already left.
29、There ___________ (be) a meeting next Monday.
30、We ___________ (know) each other since our boyhood..
31、Sometimes my father ___________ (come) back home late.
32、They ___________ (have) an English evening next week.
33、I’m very glad___________ (hear) that.
34、Wei Fang isn’t here. She ___________ (go) to the reading-room.
35、The story ___________ (happen) long ago.
36、They ___________ (visit) the History Museum last week.
7037、Zhang Hong ___________ (make) many friends since she came to Paris.
38、She ___________ (go) to the cinema with her classmates tomorrow evening.
39、Stay here, bag. Don’t go out. It ___________(rain) now.
40、Li Ping___________ (write) a composition every week.
41、The scientist ___________ (give) us a talk yesterday.
42、My parents ___________ (live) in Beijing since 1949.
43、Look! The young worker___________ (show) the students around the factory now.
44、They ___________ (build) a new bridge over the river next year.
45、The students___________ (clean) their classroom tomorrow.
46、The windows of our lab ___________ (clean) once a week.
47、Our teacher ___________ (join) the party twenty years ago.
48、The boys___________ (have) a basketball match now. Let’s ___(go) and
_____(watch).
49、She___________ (work) in this factory for ten years.
50、 “What makes you ___________ (think) I’m a farmer?” the Frenchman asked.
四.答案
1. comes 25. writes watch
2. stopped 26. is sleeping 49. has worked
3. will take 27. was doing think
4. put 28. reached
5. are getting 29. will be
6. to let 30. have known
7. waiting 31. comes
8. took … to finish 32. will have
9. is 33. to hear
10. do 34. has gone
11. is singing 35. happened
12. Was 36. visited
13. has taught 37. has made
14. doesn’t rain 38. will go
15. listens 39. is raining
16. Have … done 40. writes
17. to hear … will give 41. gave
18. didn’t snow 42. have lived
19. play 43. is showing
20. am mending 44. will build
21. carry 45. will clean
22. wanted , get 46. is cleaned
23. will write 47. joined
24. has visited 48. are having, go …
71第十五章 情态动词
一.概念:
情态动词是表示能力,义务,必须,猜测等说话人的语气或情态的动词.
二.相关知识点精讲:
1．can
1)表能力
can表能力时意味着凭体力或脑力或技术等可以无甚阻力地去做某事。
I can climb this pole. 我能爬这根杆子。
He is only four , but he can read. 他只有4岁，但已认得字了。
Fire can’t destroy gold. 火烧不毁金子。
因为can不能和其他助动词连用，所以表示将来式时用will be able to
You will be able to skate after you have practiced it two or three times.
你练习两三次后就会溜冰了。
2)表可能性
多用于否定与疑问结构中，但也可用在肯定句中。
Can the news be true? 这消息可能是真的吗？
It can’t be true. 它不可能是真的。
What can he possibly mean? 他可能是什么意思？
can 用在肯定句中表示理论上的可能性（一时的可能）。
A horse in the center of London can cost a lot of money.
Attending the ball can be very exciting.
The road can be blocked. 这条路可能会不通的。
may 在肯定句中表示现实的可能性。
The road may be blocked. 这条路可能不通了。
3)表示允许（和may意思相近）常见于口语。
Can (May) I come in ? 我能进来吗？
Can I smoke here ? 我可以在这里抽烟吗？
2.could的用法
1)表过去的可能和许可，（多用于间接引语中）
At that time we thought the story could not be true.
那时我们认为所说的事不可能是真的。
Father said I could swim in the river.
爸爸说我可以在河里游泳。
2)表过去的能力
I could swim when I was only six.
我刚六岁就能游泳。
Could在肯定句中表示过去的能力时，常表抽象的一般的能力。
He could be very naughty when he was a child.
他小时候会是很顽皮的。
3)表“允许”。可表示委婉客气的提出问题或陈述看法
Could I use your bike?
Yes, you can.
他会记得那时吗?I’m afraid I couldn’t give you an answer today.
恐怕我今天不能回答你。
The teacher said you could go to the store for sweets.
老师说你可以去商店买糖。
3)Could/can+have done 结构表示对过去发生的事情的“怀疑”或“不肯定”。 could 加完成式还用于肯定句时一般
表过去可能完成而却未完成的动作。
Can they have won the basketball match？
他们赢了那场篮球赛吗？
What you referred to just now can have made her very sad.
你刚刚所谈到的可能令他很伤心。
You could have completed the task a little earlier.
你本来能早点完成任务的。（但事实上并没有提前完成任务）
I could have passed my examination easily but I made too many stupid mistakes.
我本可以轻易通过考试，但我犯了太多不该犯的错误。
如表具体做某一件事的能力时，则须用 be able to .
He was able to translate the article without a dictionary.
他可以不用词典翻译那篇文章。
Can表示一贯的能力 ，be able to表示客观能力和通过努力可以达到的能力
I can’t swim. But I am sure I will be able to swim through more practicing.
The fire spread through the hotel, but everyone was able to get out
When the boat sank he was able to swim to the bank
3.may 的用法
1)表示请求、可以、允许。
You may drive the tractor. 你可以开那台拖拉机。
2)当回答由may 引起的问题时，否定答语要用must not,表示“不许可”、“不应该”、“不行”。
May I come in?
Yes, you may.
No,you can’t
No, you may not .
No ,you mustn’t
No ,you’d better not.
3) may /might 推测性用法 可能
He may be right.
He may not come today (可能不)
He may /might come tomorrow.
, 注意: 1只用于肯定和否定句中,不用于疑问句中。
2 might 比may可能性更小
He might get a job.
He may get a job.
3 may no 可能不 can not不可能
He may not come
He can’t come
3)表建议（可和as well 连用）
You may（might）as well stay where you are.
你还是原地待着好。（may as well 有“还是……的好”的含义）
4)表祝愿May you be happy!
might
1)表过去的“可能”和“允许”多用于间接引语。
She said that he might take her dictionary.
她说他可以拿她的词典去用。
除在间接引语中外，might一般不表示过去的“可能”与“许可”。表过去的“可能”可用could，表过去的“许可”可
用were (was) allowed to。
2)表现在的“可能”，其可能性要比may小。
Electric irons could be dangerous; they might give you a severe shock.
电熨斗会有危险，它可能电着人。
3)may (might) + have +done 表示对过去发生行为的推测，含有“想必”、“也许是”的意思。
It may have been true. 这事也许是真的。
He might not have settled the question. 他可能尚未解决那个问题。
4.must 的主要用法。
1)表示必须、必要
We must do everything step by step .我们必须按部就班地做一切事情。
Why must you always bother me? 为什么你偏要打扰我呢。
2)must be + 表语的结构，通常表示猜测，含有“一定”之意。（只用在肯定句中）
He must be an honest boy. 他一定是个诚实的男孩。
This must be your room. 这一定是你的房间。
3)must 的否定式有两个：当回答由must引起的问题时，否定答复要用needn’t或don’t have to 表示“不必”、
“无须”、“用不着”、“不一定”的意义。当表示“不应该”、“不许可”、“禁止”时，就用must not。
Must I go tomorrow?明天我必须去吗？
Yes, please.是的，请吧！
No , you needn’t. 不，你不必去。
4)must +have +过去分词的结构，常用在肯定句中，表示对过去发生行为的推测，含有“一定”、“准是”的意思。否定
和疑问句用can。
She must have studied English before.她以前一定学过英语。
5.have to的含义与must是很接近的,只是have to 比较强调客观需要，must着重说明主观看法。
I must clean the room.（主观想法）
I have to clean the room.（客观需要）
另外，have to 能用于更多时态：
We had to be there at ten .我们得在十点钟到那里。
We will have to reconsider the whole thing.
这一切我们将不得不重新加以考虑。
have to 的否定式：don’t have to do 表示“不必做……”之意。
6.ought to 的用法
Ought to 后接动词原形，表义务，但不及must 那样具有信心，如：
You don’t look well. You ought to go to see the doctor.
你气色不好，应该去看病。
Ought to 用于否定句，其否定形式可缩略为oughtn’t ，如：
You oughtn’t to smoke so much. 你不应该抽这么多烟。
也可以用于疑问句，如：
Ought you to smoke so much?你应该抽这样多烟吗？
Ought to 在间接引语中表过去时形式不变，如：
He said you ought to tell the police.他说你应该去报告警察。
7.shall的用法
1)用于第一人称征求对方的意见，如：
What shall I wear on the journey? 我路上穿什么好呢？
Shall we dance? 我们跳舞好吗？
2)shall 用于第二、三人称时表允诺，警告，命令，威胁（现已少见），如：
She shall get her share. 她可以得到她的一份。
You shall have it back tomorrow.你明天可以将它拿回。
情态动词should一般不应被认为是情态动词shall的过去式，主要用法有：
1)用于第一人称疑问句中询问对方的意愿，但语气较委婉温和，如：
What should we do now? 我们现在该怎么办？
2)表示应该、必须，常与must 换用。例如：
We should (must) master a foreign language at least.
我们应当至少掌握一门外语。
3)“should+be+表语”的结构，表示推测或惊奇。例如：
They should be back by now. 他们现在应该回来了吧。
I am sorry that she should be so careless. 我感到遗憾她竟会那样粗心。
4)“should+have+过去分词”的结构，表示过去该做而实际上尚未做的动作或行为；其否定则表示发生了不应该发生的
行为。其同义结构“ought to have +过去分词”,表示过去“早应该”、“本当”之意，语气较强。例如：
I should have thought of that. 这一点我是应当想到的。（但没想到）
They should not have left so soon.他们不应当走得这么早。（但已走了）
5) 在“It is natural (strange, natural, necessary, surprised, impossible, important ) that……”句型中，
主语从句中的谓语动词要用should +动词原形”表示“理所当然”、“奇怪”、“必要”、“惊异”等的意思。在lest（以
免）、for fear (that) (以防)、in case（以备万一）等之后也要用should+动词原形;在advise, sugest, order,
demand, request 等的从句中should+do”例如：
It is necessary that he(should) be sent there at once.
有必要马上派他到那里去。
It is strange that he should say so. 他会说这样的话真是奇怪。
Let us go at once lest we should be late for the train.
我们马上走吧，以免赶不上火车。
8..will和would的用法
1）表示意志，决心或愿望。例如：
Surely we will support all the people in the world in their struggle for peace.
我们一定要支持全世界人民争取和平的斗争。
He would not let me try it . 他不肯让我去试。
2）will表示经常性、习惯性、倾向性，would表示过去的习惯行为。
He will sit there hour after hour looking at the traffic go by.
他会经常一连几个小时坐在那儿观看来往的车辆。
He would come to see me when he was in Beijing.
他在北京时，常来看望我。
3）用于第二人称作主语的疑问句中，表示对对方的请求，would的语气比will委碗
Would/will you kindly tell me the way to the station? 请问到火车站怎么走？
4）表可能性
This will be the book you are looking for.
这可能就是你要找的书。
She eould be about 60 when she died.他死时大概60岁。
9. need和dare的用法
情态动词need 实义动词 need
现 You need (not) do You (don’t) need to do
在
时 He need (not) do He needs (doesn’t need) to do
过 You needed (didn’t need) to do
去
时 He needed (didn’t need) to do
将 You need (not) do You will (not) need to do
来
时 He need (not) do He will (not) need to do
句型 时态 动词
情态动词dare 实义动词 dare
肯定句 现在时 dare to 少用 dare/dares to do
过去时 dare to 少用 dared to do
否定句 现在时 daren’t/dare not do do/does not dare (to) do
过去时 dared not do did not dare (to) do
疑问句 现在时 Dare he do? Do you/Does he dear (to) do?
过去时 Dared he do? Did he dare (to) do
needn’t have v-ed 表示过去做了某事，但没有做的必要， 意为“本没必要…”。例如：
You needn’t have waken me up; I don’t have to go to work today
10.表推测的情态动词句子的反意疑问句
He must/may be in the room, isn’t he?
He can’t be in the room, is he？
He must have finished the work, hasn’t he?
He may have done the work last night, didn’t he?
：情态动词+行为动词进行式
情态动词+行为动词进行式（即情态动词+ be + v-ing形式），表示推测或评论某动作现在是否正在进行。例如：
1）He must be playing basketball in the room.
2）She may be staying at home.
11.情态动词+行为动词完成进行式
情态动词+行为动词完成进行式（即情态动词+ have been + v-ing 形式），表示推测或评论过去某动作是否正在
进行或一直在进行。例如：
1）They should have been meeting to discuss the problem.
2）He may / might have been buying stamps in the post office when you saw him.
12.used to +v, be used to +v-ing和be used to +v
（1）used to +v意为“过去常常”，“过去一直”；be used to +v-ing / n（名词）意为“习惯于”；be used to +v
意为“被用来（做某事）”。
（2）used to只表示过去，而be used to +v-ing / n可表示现在、过去或将来。例如：
1）He used to smoke. Now he doesn’t.
2）He’s quite used to hard work / working hard.
3）The knife is used to cut bread.13．用作情态动词的其他短语
would rather, would sooner, would (just) as soon, had rather, had better, had sooner, can not but,
may (just) as well等可用作情态动词。例如：
1）The soldier would sooner die than surrender.
2）The brave soldier would as soon die as yield to such an enemy.
3）I’d rather walk than take a bus.
4）If you don’t like to swim, you may just as well stay at home.
注：这些短语后一般直接跟动词原形.would (had) rather, would (had) sooner, would (just) as soon后可
跟that 引导的从句，that 常省去，从句要用虚拟语气。对现在和将来的假设用过去时，对过去的假设用过去完成时。
例如：
1）I would rather you came on Sunday.
2）I would sooner you hadn’t asked me to speak yesterday.
一. 巩固练习:
1. _____ you ready?
(A) Are (B) Have (C) Will (D) Can
2. ____ here early?
(A) Will he (B) Was he (C) Did he be (D) Were he
3. I ___ happy about the price of eggs.
(A) am't (B) am not (C) do not (D) won’t
4. Since last year I____ him only once.
(A) have seen (B) have been seeing (C) see (D) was seeing
5. Donald ___ sixteen tomorrow.
(A) is being (B) going to be (C) shall be (D) will be
6. I ___ the story at all.
(A) don't like (B) like (C) am fond of (D) would like
7. I would rather ___ than play now.
(A) to study (B)am studying (C) study (D) studied
8. I'd rather you ___ anything about it for the time being.
(A) do (B) didn't do (C) don't (D) didn't
9. The car___much money.
(A) not cost (B) not have cost (C) isn't cost (D) didn't cost
10. I ___ like to eat fish.
(A) am (B) have (C) do (D) be
11. ___ repeat the question?
(A) Shall I (B) Will I (C)Would you like that I (D) Do you want that I
12. My teacher knows more than ___.
(A) my uncle knows (B) my uncle does
(C) they know (D)they don't know
13. He___to meet us at the station, but didn't see us.
(A) did go (B) did went (C) goes (D) had
14. Not only ____us light.
(A) does the sun give (B) the sun gives
(C) gives the sun (D) the sun does give
15. ____ you tell me what has happened?
(A) May (B) Must (C) Can (D) Could
16. Anne___tomorrow.(A) can sing (B) can to sing (C) is going sing (D) going to sing
17. You___hand it in at once, you may hand it in tomorrow.
(A) needn't (B) may not (C) can't (D) must not
18. Tell the boy that he ___ in the river.
(A) swims (B) swim (C) swimming (D) to swim
19. Joan___play on Saturday.
(A) going to (B) can (C) is going (D) can to
20. Susan and I can go to the lecture ___.
(A) but neither can Charles (B) and so Charies can
(C) but Charles can't (D) and Charles also can
四.答案
1. (A) 2, (B) 3. (B) 4. (A) 5, (D)
6, (A) 7. (C) 8. (B) 9. (9) 10, (C)
11. (A) 12. (B) 13. (A) 14. (A) 15. (D) 16. (A)
17. (A) 18. (B) 19. (B) 20, (C)
第十六章 动词不定式
一.相关知识点精讲:
1. 不定式作补语
1） 有些有动词+宾语+不定式的结构。例如：
advise allow cause challenge command compel
drive 驱使 enable encourage forbid force impel
induce instruct invite like/love order permit
make let have want get warn
persuade request send tell train urge
例如；
Father will not allow us to play on the street. 父亲不让我们在街上玩耍。
The officer ordered his men to fire. 长官命令士兵开火。
注意：有些动词如make，have，get，want等可用不定式作做宾补，也可用分词作宾补。现在分词表达主动，也表达正
在进行，过去分词表达被动。
2) 有些有动词+宾语+不定式的结构，不定式的动词往往是be，不定式一般可以省去。例如：
consider find believe think declare （ 声 appoint
称）
guess fancy（设想） guess judge imagine know
例如：
We believe him to be guilty. 我们相信他是有罪的。
We know him to be a fool. 我们知道他是个笨蛋。（to be 不能省去）
典型例题
Charles Babbage is generally considered ___ the first computer.
A. to invent B. inventing C. to have invented D. having invented
答案：C. 一般没有consider+宾语+be以外不定式的结构，也没有consider+宾语+doing的结构，排除A、B、D。consider
用动词be以外的不定式作宾补时，一般要求用不定式的完成式，故选C。
3) 有些动词可以跟there +to be的结构。例如：
更多免费资源关注公众号：贩梦笠翁 来源网络侵删，请在使用24h内删believe expect intend like love mean
prefer want wish understand
例如：
We didn't expect there to be so many people there. 我们没料到会有那么多人在那里。
You wouldn’t want there to be another war. 你不至于想让另外一场战争发生吧。
2. 不定式作主语
不定式作主语，往往用it作形式主语，真正的主语不定式放至句子的后面。
例如：It's so nice to hear your voice. 听到你的声音真高兴。
It's necessary for you to lock the car when you do not use it. 不用车的时候，锁车是有必要的。
It's very kind of you to help us. 他帮助我们，他真好。
It seemed selfish of him not to give them anything. 他不给他们任何东西，这显得太自私了。
但是，用不定式作主语的句子中还有一个不定式作表语时，不能用It is… to…的句型。另外，这样的句子，不能用
动名词作表语。
3. It's for sb.和 It's of sb.
这样的句子中，由于表语形容词性质的不同，导致了不定式逻辑主语标志用for或of的区别。
1）for sb. 句型中的形容词一般为表示事物的特征特点，表示客观形式的形容词，如 easy, hard, difficult,
interesting, impossible等：例如：
It's very hard for him to study two languages. 对他来说学两门外语是很难的。
2）of sb句型中的形容词一般为表示性格，品德，心智能力，表示主观感情或态度的形容词，如good, kind, nice,
clever, foolish, right。例如：
It's very nice of you to help me. 你来帮助我，你真是太好了。
用for还是用of 的另一种辨别方法：
用介词for或of后面的逻辑主语作句子的主语，用介词前边的形容词作表语，造个句子。如果通顺用of，不通则
用for。例如：
You are nice. （通顺，所以应用of）。
He is hard. （非所表达的意思，不通，因此用for。）
4. 不定式作表语
不定式可放在be动词后面，形成表语。例如：
My work is to clean the room every day. 我的工作是每天清扫房间。
His dream is to be a doctor. 他的梦想是成为一名医生。
5. 不定式作定语
不定式做定语通常要放在被修饰的词后，往往表示未发生的动作。例如：
I have a lot of work to do. 我有许多事要做。
There was nothing to bring home that morning. 那天早上（他回家时）两手空空。
6. 不定式作状语
1）目的状语
常用结构为to do , only to do（仅仅为了）, in order to do, so as to do, so（such）… as to…（如
此…以便…）。例如：
He ran so fast as to catch the first bus. 他飞快地跑以便赶上第一班车。
I come here only to say good-bye to you. 我来仅仅是向你告别。
2）作结果状语，可以表示没有预料到的或事与愿违的结果，不定式要放在句子后面。
I awoke to find my truck gone. 我醒来发现箱子不见了。
He searched the room only to find nothing. 他搜索了房间，没发现什么。
3） 表原因
I'm glad to see you. 见到你很高兴。
She wept to see the sight. 她一看到这情形就哭了。4）表示理由和条件
He must be a fool to say so.
You will do well to speak more carefully.
7.用作介词的to
to 可以用作介词，也可用作不定式的标示。下面的to 都用作介词：
admit to object to be accustomed be used to stick to turn to开始
to
look forward be devoted pay attention contribute apologize devote oneself
to to to to to to
8. 省去to 的动词不定式
1） 情态动词 （ 除ought 外） 后。
2） 使役动词 let, have, make后，感官动词 see, watch, look at, notice , observe, hear, listen to, smell,
feel, find 等后。
注意：被动语态中不能省去to。例如：
I saw him dance. 我看见他跳舞。
=He was seen to dance.
The boss made them work the whole night. 老板让他们整夜干活。
=They were made to work the whole night.
3） would rather，had better句型后
4） Why… / why no…句型后
5） help 后可带to，也可不带to, help sb （to） do sth：
6） but和except后。but前是实义动词do时，后面出现的不定式不带to。
比较：He wants to do nothing but go out. 他只想出去玩。
He wants to believe anything but to take the medicine. 除了吃这药，他什么都信。
7） 由and, or和than连接的两个不定式，第二个to 可以省去：
8） 通常在discover, imagine, suppose, think等词后作宾补时，可以省去to be。例如：
He is supposed （to be） nice. 他应该是个好人。
9.动词不定式的否定式
在不定式标志to前加上not。例如：
Tell him not to shut the window。让他别关窗。
She pretended not to see me when I passed by. 我走过的时候，她假装没看见。
10.不定式的特殊句型too…to…
1）too…to 太…以至于…。例如：
He is too excited to speak. 他太激动了，说不出话来。
---- Can I help you ? 需要我帮忙吗?
---- Well, I'm afraid the box is too heavy for you to carry it, but thank you all the same.
不用了。这箱子太重，恐怕你搬不动。谢谢。
2） 如在too前有否定词，则整个句子用否定词表达肯定，too 后那个词表达一种委婉含义，意 为"不太"。例如：
It's never too late to mend. 改过不嫌晚。（谚语）
3） 当too 前面有only, all, but时，意思是：非常… 等于very。例如：
I'm only too pleased to be able to help you. 能帮助你我非常高兴。
He was but too eager to get home. 他非常想回家。
11. 不定式的特殊句型so as to
1） 表示目的；它的否定式是so as not to do。例如：
Tom kept quiet about the accident so as not to lose his job.汤姆对事故保持沉默是为了不丢掉他的工
作。Go in quietly so as not to wake the baby.轻点进去，别惊醒了婴儿。
2） 表示结果。例如：
Would you be so kind as to tell me the time? 劳驾，现在几点了。
12. 不定式的特殊句型Why not
"Why not +动词原形"表达向某人提出建议，翻译为："为什么不……?" "干吗不……?"。例如：
Why not take a holiday? 干吗不去度假?
13.不定式的时态和语态
1） 一般式表示的动词，有时与谓语动词表示的动作同时发生，有时发生在谓语动词的动作之后，例如
He seems to know this. 他似乎知道这事。
I hope to see you again. = I hope that I'll see you again. 我希望再见到你。
2） 完成式表示的动作发生在谓语动词表示的动作之前。例如：
I'm sorry to have given you so much trouble. 很抱歉，给你添了那么多的麻烦。
He seems to have caught a cold. 他好像已经得了感冒。
3） 进行式表示动作正在进行，与谓语动词表示的动作同时发生。例如：
He seems to be eating something. 他好像正在吃什么东西。
4） 完成进行式表示动作从过去开始并延续至说话的时候。例如：
She is known to have been working on the problem for many years. 我们知道她研究这问题有好几年了。
14. 动名词与不定式
1）动名词与不定式的区别：
动名词表达的是： 状态，性质，心境，抽象，经常性，已发生的
不定式表达的是： 目的，结果，原因，具体，一次性，将发生的
2）有些动词如continue接不定式或动名词作宾语，意义基本相同。
3）有些动词如continue接不定式或动名词作宾语，意义大相径庭。常见的，下一节有专门讨论
第十七章 名词性从句
在句子中起名词作用的句子叫名词性从句(Noun Clauses）。 名词性从句的功能相当于名词词组, 它在复合句中能担
任主语、宾语、表语、同位语、介词宾语等，因此根据它在句中不同的语法功能，名词从句又可分别称为主语从句、宾
语从句、表语从句和同位语从句。
一． 主语从句
主语从句是在复合句中充当主语的从句，通常放在主句谓语动词之前或由形式主语it代替，而本身放在句子末尾。
1. It 作形式主语和it引导强调句的比较
It 作形式主语代替主语从句，主要是为了平衡句子结构，主语从句的连接词没有变化。而 it 引导的强调句则是对句子
某一部分进行强调，无论强调的是什么成分，都可用连词that。被强调部分指人时也可用who/whom。例如：
a) It is a pity that you didn’t go to see the film. 你不去看那场电影真可惜。
b) It doesn’t interest me whether you succeed or not. 我对你成功与否不感兴趣。
c) It is in the morning that the murder took place. 谋杀案是在早上发生的。（强调句型）
d) It is John that broke the window. 是John打碎的窗户。（强调句型）
2. 用it 作形式主语的结构
(1) It is ＋ 名词 ＋ 从句
It is a fact that … 事实是…It is an honor that …非常荣幸
It is common knowledge that …是常识
(2) It is ＋ 形容词 ＋ 从句
It is natural that… 很自然…
It is strange that… 奇怪的是…
(3) It is ＋ 不及物动词 ＋ 从句
It seems that… 似乎…
It happened that… 碰巧…
It appears that… 似乎…
(4) It ＋ 过去分词 ＋ 从句
It is reported that… 据报道…
It has been proved that… 已证实…
It is said that… 据说…
3. 主语从句不可位于句首的五种情况：
（1）if 引导的主语从句不可居于复合句句首。
（2）It is said /reported…结构中的主语从句不可提前。例如：
正确表达：It is said that President Jiang will visit our school next week.
错误表达：That President Jiang will visit our school next week is said.
（3）It happens/occurs…结构中的主语从句不可提前。例如：
正确表达：It occurred to him that he failed in the examination.
错误表达：That he failed in the examination occurred to him.
（4）It doesn’t matter how/whether …结构中的主语从句不可提前。例如：
正确表达：It doesn’t matter whether he is wrong or not.
错误表达：Whether he is wrong or not doesn’t matter.
（5）含主语从句的复合句是疑问句时，主语从句不可提前。例如：
正确表达：Is it likely that it will rain in the evening?
错误表达：Is that will rain in the evening likely?
4. what 与that 在引导主语从句时的区别
what 引导主语从句时在句时在从句中充当句子成分，如主语．宾语．表语，而that 则不然。例如：
a) What you said yesterday is right.
b) That she is still alive is a consolation
二．宾语从句
宾语从句就是在复合句中作宾语的名词性从句，通常放在主句谓语动词 (及物动词) 或介词之后。
1. 作动词的宾语
(1) 由that引导的宾语从句(that 通常可以省略), 例如：
I heard that be joined the army. 我听说他参军了。
(2) 由what, whether (if) 引导的宾语从句，例如：
a) She did not know what had happened. 她不知道发生了什么。
b) I wonder whether you can change this note for me. 我想知道你是否能帮我改一下笔记。
(3) 动词＋间接宾语＋宾语从句。例如：
She told me that she would accept my invitation. 她对我说她会接受我的邀请。2. 作介词的宾语，例如：
Our success depends upon how well we can cooperate with one another. 我们的成功取决于我们之间的合作。
3. 作形容词的宾语，例如：
I am afraid (that) I’ve made a mistake. 我恐怕我已经犯了一个错误。
注意：that 引导的从句常跟在下列形容词后作宾语：anxious, aware, certain, confident, convinced, determined, glad, proud,
surprised, worried, sorry, thankful, ashamed, disappointed, annoyed, pleased, hurt, satisfied, content 等。也可以将此类词后的
that 从句的看作原因状语从句。
4. it 可以作为形式宾语
it 不仅可以作为形式主语，还可以作为形式宾语而真正的宾语that 从句则放在句尾，特别是在带复合宾语的句子
中。 例如：
We heard it that she would get married next month. 我听说她下个朋就会结婚了。
5. 后边不能直接跟that 从句的动词
这类动词有allow, refuse, let, like, cause, force, admire, condemn, celebrate, dislike, love, help, take, forgive等。这类
词后可以用不定式或动名词作宾语，但不可以用that引导的宾语从句。如：
正确表达：I admire their winning the match.
错误表达：I admire that they won the match.
6. 不可用that从句作直接宾语的动词
有些动词不可用于“动词＋间接宾语＋that从句“结构中，常见的有envy, order, accuse, refuse, impress, forgive,
blame, denounce, advise, congratulate等。例如：
正确表达：He impressed the manager as an honest man.
错误表达：He impressed the manager that he was an honest man.
7. 否定的转移
若主句谓语动词为think, consider, suppose, believe, expect, fancy, guess, imagine等，其后的宾语从句若含有否
定意义，一般要把否定词转移到主句谓语上，从句谓语用肯定式。例如：
I don’t think this dress fits you well. 我认为这件衣服不适合你穿。
三. 表语从句
表语从句在复合句中作表语的名词性从句，放在系动词之后，一般结构是“主语＋连系动词＋表语从句”。可以接表语
从句的连系动词有be, look, remain, seem等。引导表语从句的that常可省略。另外，常用的还有the reason is that… 和
It is because 等结构。例如：
1) The question is whether we can make good preparation in such a short time.
2) This is why we can’t get the support of the people.
3) But the fact remains that we are behind the other classes.
4) The reason he is late for school is that he missed the early bus.
四. 同位语从句
同位语从句就是在复合句中作名词的同位语的名词性从句。
1. 同位语从句的功能
同位语从句对于名词进一步解释，说明名词的具体内容，一般由that引导，例如：1) The king’s decision that the prisoner would be set free surprised all the people.
2) The order that all the soldiers should stay still is given by the general.
2. 同位语在句子中的位置
同位语从句有时可以不紧跟在它所说明的名词后面，而是被别的词隔开。例如：
He got the news from Mary that the sports meeting was put off.
3. 同位语从句与定语从句的区别
(1) 定语从句中的 that既代替先行词，同时以在从句中作某个成分（主语或宾语），而同位语从句中的 that是连词，只
起连接主句与从句的作用，不充当句中任何成分。
(2) 定语从句是形容词性的，其功能是修饰先行词，对先行词加以限定，描述定的性质或特征；同位语从句是名词性的，
其功能是对名词进行补充说明。例如：
1) The news that he told me is that Tom would go abroad next year.（他告诉我的消息是汤姆明年将出国。）（第一个that引
导的从句是定语从句，that在从句中作宾语）
2)The news that Tom would go abroad is told by him.（汤姆将出国的消息是他讲的。）（同位语从句，that在句中不作任何
成分）
英语名词性从句专项练习
1．____he does has nothing to do with me.
A. whatever B. No matter what C. That D. If
2. The manager came over and asked the customer how____
A. did the quarrel came about B .the quarrel had come about
C. had the quarrel come about D. had the quarrel come about
3. Energy is ____makes thing work..
A. what B. something C. anything D. that
4. Information has been put forward ____ more middle school graduates will be admitted into universities.
A. while B. that C. when D. as
5. This is ___the Shenzhou V Spaceship landed.
A. there B. in which C. where D. when
6. They have no idea at all____.
A. where he has gone B. where did he go
C. which place has he gone D. where has he gone
7. The doctor did a lot to reduce the patient’s fear ____he would die of the disease.
A. that B. which C. of which D. of that
8. The order came ___the soldiers ____the small village the next morning.
A. that ;had to leave B. that; should leave
C. /; must leave D. when; should leave
9. ___is no possibility ____Bob can win the first prize in the match.
A. There; that B. It; that C. there; whether D. It; whether
10. The question came up at the meeting_____ we had enough money for our research.
A. that B. which C. whether D. if
11. Is _____he said really true?
A. that B. what C. why D. whether
12.____the meeting should last two days or three days doesn’t matter.
A. That B. Whether C. If D. Where
13. It worried her a bit _____her hair was turning gray.A. while B. if C. that D. for
14. ???_____more countries can use natural energy in the future remains to be seen.
A. Whether B. This C. who D. If
15.____he will go to work in a mountain village surprises all of us.
A. What B. That C. Whether D. If
16. ____you don’t like him is none of my business.
A. What B. That C. Who D. How
17.____all the inventions have in common is ____they have succeeded.
A. What; what B. That; that C. what; that D. That ; what
18. ____appeared to me that he enjoyed the food very much.
A. What B. It C. All that D. That
19. It is widely ______that smoking can cause cancer.
A. believed B. think C. say D. hoped
20. ____caused the accident is still a complete mystery.
A. What B. That C. How D. Where
Keys:
1—5 ABABC 6—10 AABAC 11—15 BBCAB 16—20 BCBAA
第十八章 “It”用法及其句型和固定搭配讲解
"It" 用法及其句型和固定搭配，是高中英语语法的重点、难点，又是近几年高考的热点，因此应给予充分的重视，
现将it用法归纳如下：
一、It用作实词
表达以下概念:指代前文提到的事物，前文中的 this, that；替代前文中的内容；指代一位性别不明的小孩或未知的
人；指代未指明但谈话双方都知道的那件事；指代时间、天气、气候、距离等自然现象……
二、It用作形式主语
替代作主语的从句、动词不定式、动名词，而把真正作主语的从句、动词不定式、动名词置于句尾。
It 作形式主语的常见句型：
1. 代作主语的动词不定式，其句型为
(1) It be adj. (for sb.) to do sth.
此处adj. 通常为描述事件的形容词：easy, difficult, hard, necessary, unnecessary, possible, impossible, likely, unlikely,
right, wrong, important, unimportant, legal, illegal, well-mannered, ill-mannered, polite, impolite, clear, obvious, certain, suitable,
proper, fit, useful, useless, dangerous…
例 It is illegal (for a teenager) to drive a car without a license.
(2) It be adj. of sb. to do sth.
此处adj. 通常为描述人的形容词：kind, unkind, nice, rude, cruel, considerate, thoughtful, thoughtless, careful, careless,
silly, foolish, stupid, clever, wise, crazy.
例 It's kind of you to help me with the problem.
(3) It替代作主语的动名词的常见句型
It's no good/use doing…
It's (well)worth doing…
It's (well)worth one's while doing/to do…It's (well)worth while doing/ to do
例 It's no use crying over spilt milk.
2. It替代作主语的从句常见句型
(1) It is + noun +从句
例 It is no secret that the president wants to have a second term at office.
(2) It is adj. +clause
It's surprising that… (should)………竟然……
It's a pity/shame that…(should)………竟然……
例 It's important that you should apologize to her for your rudeness.(=It's of much importance that you should
apologize to her for your rudeness.)
(3) It verb sb. + clause= It is v-ing + clause
It+surprise/delight/interest/disappoint/worry/disturb/annoy/amaze
/bother/concern/frighten/please/anger sb. that…
例 It worried me that she drove so fast.(= It was worrying that she drove so fast.)
(4) It verb (to sb.) that…= sb/sth verb to do
(verb = appear, seem, come about, emerge, follow, chance, happen, occur, transpire, turn out , work out)
例 It (so) happened/chanced that they were out.(= They happened/chanced to be out.)
(5) It is v-ed that…=sb/sth is to do
(verb=say, report, think, believe, hope, expect, agree, accept, decide, determine, intend, plan, understand, know）
例 It is said that the couple have gotten divorced.(=The couple are said to have gotten divorced.)
(6) It is v-ed that … (should)…
(verb=demand, request, require, order, suggest, advise, recommend
例 It is suggested that they should begin with the third question.
三、It作主语的句型
1. It takes sb. … to do…(=sb takes…to do…)某人用多长时间做某事
例 It took the men a week to mend our roof.(= The men took a week to mend our roof.)
2. It's (just)(un)like sb. to do…（不）像某人做某事的风格
例 It was (just) like him to think of helping us.
3. It's (about/high) time that… should /v-ed…是该做某事的时候了
例 It's(about/high) time that we should take action.
4. It's the x-th time (that) … have v-ed…第几次做某事了
例 It's the third time that he has failed the driving test.
5. It is/has been… since …continuous v-ed(延续性动词) 某动作已有多长时间不发生了
例 It's 10 years that he lived here
6. It was(not)… before…过(不)了多长时间某动作发生了
例 It was not long before they arrived.
四、It 作形式宾语
用来替代作宾语的从句、动词不定式、动名词，而把真正作宾语的从句、动词不定式、动名词置于句尾。
It 作形式宾语的常见句型：
1. verb+ it+ adj./noun (for/of) to do/clause (verb=think, believe, suppose, consider, feel, make, keep…)
例 I think it hard for you to do the task on your own./I think it hard that you'll do the task on your own.
2. verb+it+adj./noun (one's) doing (adj.=useless/worth/worthwhile)(noun=no use/no good/worth one's while/a waste of
time/money/energy/words) (verb=think, believe, suppose, consider, feel, make, keep…)
例 I'll make it worth your while telling me about his secret.
3. verb+it+ important/unimportant/necessary/unnecessary/natural/essential that … (should)…
verb+it+of much/great/no/little importance that…(should)…(verb=think, believe, suppose, consider, feel, make, keep…)
例 I think it important that you (should) attendthe conference.
4. verb + it+ as+ noun/adj.+ clause (verb=accept, regard, take, see, view)
例 The lecturer takes it as encouraging when so many students attend his lecture.
5. v. +it + prep. + that…
owe it to sb. that…把…归功于…
leave it to sb that…把…留给某人去做
take it for granted that …想当然
keep it in mind that…
例 Don't bother to arrange anything. Just leave it to me to sort out.
6. It用在不能直接跟宾语从句的动词后面，尤其是表示好恶的动词后，enjoy, like, love, dislike, resent, hate, don't
mind, be fond of, feel like, see to 宾语从句紧跟it之后
例 I hate it you can swim so well and I can't.
7. It用在不能直接跟宾语从句的介词后面，宾语从句紧跟it之后（except that例外）
例 I'm for it that you will follow their advice.
五、强调句型
It is/was+被强调部分+ that(who)… 强调句型用来强调谓语动词以外的任何句子成分。当被强调部分是人时也可
以用who。
在使用强调句型时需注意以下几点：
1. 请注意强调句型的特殊疑问句
例 When was it that he changed his mind to take part in the activity？
2. 在强调原因状语从句时，只能强调由because所引导的从句
例 It was because he was ill that he didn't come to school yesterday.
3. 在强调not … until结构时必须把not与until一起放到被强调的位置上
例 It was not until she took off her dark glasses that I realized she was my brother.
4. 注意强调句型与定语从句的区别
例 It was at 7 o'clock that he came here yesterday.( 强调句型)
It was 7 o'clock when he came here yesterday.(定语从句)
六、It 常用的固定搭配
1. make it
(1).在口语当中相当于succeed,表示：成功、做到、说定、赶上、及时到达
例 It's hard to make it to the top in show business.
(2).在口语中相当于fix the date for,表示“约定好时间”
例 —Shall we meet next week?
—OK. We just make it next Saturday.
2. as it is
(1).相当于in fact, in reality表示“事实上，实际情况是……”
例 We had planed to finish the task today, but as it is we probably won't finish it until next week.
(2).相当于方式状语从句，表示“照原样”
例 Leave the table as it is.
3. as it were 相当于as one might say, that is to say, 表示“也就是说，可以说，换句话说”
例 He is, as it were, a modern Sherlock Holmes.
4. if it weren't for…/if it hadn't been for…用来引导虚拟语气，相当于without, or but for, 表示“如果不是……，要
不是……”
例 If it weren't for Tom, I wouldn't be alive today.
5. that's it(1). 相当于That's all. That's so much. 表示“至此为止，没有别的了”
例 You can have one more sweet, and that's it.
(2). 相当于 That's right.表示“对啦”
例 — I guess the key to the problem is thechoice “A”
—That's it.
6. catch it 在口语中，相当于be punished/scolded for doing sth. wrong. 表示“因做错事而挨骂，受责备，受批评，
受惩罚”
例 We'll really catch it form our teacher if we're late for class again.
7. have it
(1).相当于say, insist表示“说，主张，表明，硬说”
例 Rumour has it that they are getting divorced.
(2).相当于get to know something,表示“了解，知道，获悉”
例 I had it from John that she was going abroad.
8. have what it takes在口语中，相当于be well qualified for, 表示“具有成功的条件”
例 You can take it from me that your daughter has what it takes to be a star.
9. so it seems / appears.
10. Keep at it! (Don't give up!)相当于go on,表示“继续做，不放弃”
例 My teacher asked me to keep at it.
11. Go it! (Go on!) 拼命干, 莽撞
12. Now you have done it! (You have done sth. wrong.)
13. Now you'll catch it! (You'll be punished.)
14. As it happened, … 在口语中，相当于it's a pity that…, 表示“真不凑巧，真遗憾”
例 As it happened, they were out.
15. As it turned out,…在口语中，相当于it was found to be in the end, 表示“最后被证明是”
例 As it turned out, his statement was false.
16. Such as it is(they are) 在口语中，相当于although it may not be worth much, 表示“虽然没有多大价值”
例 You can borrow my exam notebook, such as it is.
17. Take it/things easy. 相当于Don't worry or don't hurry. 用来劝告别人，表示“不要慌，别担心，存住气”
例 Take it easy! He will do it well.
18. Take it from me.在口语中，相当于believe me what I say.表示“请相信我的话，我敢担保”
例 You can take it from me that he will make it this time.
19. For what it is worth…在口语中，相当于although I'm not sure it's of value, 表示“不管其价值如何”
例 Here is the article I promise you, for what it's worth.
20. Worth it 在口语中，相当于useful, 表示“有好处，值得做”
例 Don't hesitate about it! It's worth it.
21. Believe it or not.表示“信不信由你”
例 Believe it or not, Tom is getting married to Mary next Sunday.
22. Take it or leave it. v. 要么接受要么放弃
例 That is my last offer. You can take it or leave it.
23. It all depends/that all depends 在口语中，相当于it hasn't been decided yet, 表示“那得看情况，还没有定下来”
例 —Are you going to the countryside for holiday?
—It/That all depends.
24. It's up to sb. 在口语中，相当于it's decided by sb. 表示“由……决定，由……负责，取决于……”
例 —Shall we go out for dinner?
—It's up to you.“It”用法及其句型和固定搭配专练
1. Was it during the Second World War_____ he died?
A.that B.while C.in which D.then (88)
2. Is ____ necessary to complete the design before National Day?
A.this B.that C.it D.he (89)
3. I don't think ____ possible to master a foreign language without much memory work.
A.this B.that C.its D.it (91)
4.Does ______ matter if he can't finish the job on time?
A.this B.that C.he D.it (91)
5. It was not _____ she took off her glasses _____ I realized she was a famous film star.
A.when , that B.until , that C.until , that D.when , then (92)
6. I was disappointed with the film. I had expected ______ to be much better.
A.that B.this C.one D.it (93)
7. It was not until 1920 ______ regular radio broadcasts began.
A.while B.which C.that D.since (94)
8. ______is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.
A.There B.This C.That D.It (95)
9. It was only when I reread this poems recently _____ I began to appreciate their beauty.
A.until B.that C.then D.so (97)
10. I hate_____when people talk with their mouths full.
A.it B.that C.these D.them (98)
11. It is the ability to do the job _____ matters not where you come from or what you are.
A.one B.that C.what D.it (2000)
12.I like ___ in the autumn when the weather is clear and bright. (2004)
A. this B. that C. it D. one
13. —Do you like ___ here?
—Oh, yes. The air, the weather, the way of life. Everything is so nice.(全国卷)
A. this B. These C. That D. it
14. We needed a new cupboard for the kitchen. So Peter made ___ from some wood. (全国卷)
A. it B. One C. Himself D. another
15. The foreign Minister said, " _____ our hope that the two sides will work towards peace."(2004北京)
A. This is B. There is C. That is D. It is
16. _____ is reported in the newspaper, talks between the two countries are making progress. (2004北京)
A. It B. As C. That D. What
17. — How often do you eat out?(2004, 天津)
— ________, but usually once a week.
A. Have no idea B. It depends C. As usual D. Generally speaking
18. We wanted to get home before dark, but it didn't quite _____ as planed. (2004浙江卷)
A. make out B. turn out C. go on D. come up
19. — What do you want to do next? We have half an hour until the basketball game.
—________. Whatever you want to do is fine with me.
A. It just depends B. It's up to you C. All right D. Glad to hear that
20. It was ____ back home after the experiment.
A. not until midnight did he go
B. until midnight that he didn't goC. not until midnight that he went
D. until midnight when he didn't go
KEYS:
1-5 ACDDB 6-10 DCDBA 11-15 ACDBD 16-20 BBBBC
第十九章 倒装结构
一 全部倒装
全部倒装是指将句子中的谓语动词全部置于主语之前。此结构通常只用与一般现在时和一般过去时。常见的结构有：
1. here, there, now, then, thus等副词置于句首, 谓语动词常用be, come, go, lie, run。例如：
1) There goes the bell. 铃声渐渐消失了。
2) Then came the chairman. 然后主席就来了
3) Here is your letter. 这是你的信。
2. 表示运动方向的副词或地点状语置于句首，谓语表示运动的动词。例如：
1) Out rushed a missile from under the bomber. 轰炸机下面发出了一颗导弹。
2) Ahead sat an old woman.
注意：上述全部倒装的句型结构的主语必须是名词，如果主语是人称代词则不能完全倒装。例如：
1) Here he comes. 他来了。
2) Away they went. 他们走了。
二 部分倒装
部分倒装是指将谓语的一部分如助动词或情态倒装至主语之前。如果句中的谓语没有助动词或情态动词，则需添加
助动词do, does或did，并将其置于主语之前。
1. 句首为否定或半否定的词语，如no, not, never, seldom, little, hardly, at no time, in no way, not until… 等。例如：
1) Never have I seen such a performance. 我从来没看过这样的表演。
2) Nowhere will you find the answer to this question. 你在哪儿都不会找到这个问题的答案。
3) Not until the child fell asleep did the mother leave the room. 妈妈直到孩子睡着才离开房间。
注意：当Not until引出主从复合句，主句倒装，从句不倒装。
注意： 如否定词不在句首不倒装。例如：
1) I have never seen such a performance.我从来没看过这样的表演。
2) The mother didn't leave the room until the child fell asleep.妈妈直到孩子睡着才离开房间。
2. 带有否定意义的词放在句首，语序需要部分倒装。常见的词语有： not , never , seldom , scarcely , barely , little , at
no time , not only , not once , under on condition , hardly … when , no sooner …than …等。例如：
1) Not only did he refuse the gift, he also severely criticized the sender. 他不仅拒收了礼品，还狠狠批评了送礼的人。
2) Hardly had she gone out when a student came to visit her. 她刚要出门时有个学生来找她。
3) No sooner had she gone out than a student came to visit her. 她刚要走时一个学生来看她。
注意：只有当Not only… but also连接两个分句时，才在第一个分句用倒装结构。如果置于句首的Not only… but also
仅连接两个并列词语，不可用倒装结构。例如：Not only you but also I am fond of music. 我和你都喜欢音乐。
3. 表示"也"、"也不" 的so, neither, nor放在句首时，句子作部分倒装。例如：
1) Tom can speak French. So can Jack. Tom能说法语，我也能。
2) If you won't go, neither will I. 如果你不去，我也不去。
注意： 当so引出的句子用以对上文内容加以证实或肯定时，不可用倒装结构。意为"的确如此"。例如：
1) Tom asked me to go to play football and so I did. Tom让我去踢足球，我去了。
2) ---It's raining hard. ---So it is. ---雨下得很大。 ---的确很大。
4. only放在句首，强调状语（副词，介词短语或状语从句等），全句语序要部分倒装。例如：
Only in this way, can you learn English well.你只有用这种方法才能学好英语。
Only after being asked three times did he come to the meeting. 他被请了三次才来开会。
注意：如果句子为主从复合句，则主句倒装，从句不倒装
Only when he is seriously ill, does he ever stay in bed. 他只有病得非常严重时才会卧床休息。
三 as, though 引导的倒装句
as / though引导的让步从句必须将表语或状语提前 （形容词, 副词, 分词, 实义动词提前）。此时应注意：1) 句首名
词不能带任何冠词；2) 句首是实义动词, 其他助动词放在主语后。如果实义动词有宾语和状语,随实义动词一起放在主
语之前。例如：
Try hard as he will, he never seems able to do the work satisfactorily. 尽管他愿意努力工作，但是他好像从来都不能
令他的工作満意。
注意: 让步状语从句中，有though，although时，后面的主句不能有but，但是 though 和yet可连用。
四 其他部分倒装
1. so… that 句型中的so 位于句首时，需倒装。例如：
So frightened was he that he did not dare to move an inch. 他害怕得动都不敢动。
2. 在某些表示祝愿的句型中，例如：
May you all be happy. 望大家开心愉快。
3. 在虚拟语气条件句中从句谓语动词有were, had, should等词，可将if 省略，把 were, had, should 移到主语之前，
采取部分倒装。例如：
Were I you, I would try it again. 如果我是你，我就再试一次。
第二十章 定语从句
定语从句（Attributive Clauses）在句中做定语，修饰一个名词或代词，有时也可以修饰部分或整个句子。
被修饰的名词，词组或代词即先行词。定语从句通常出现在先行词之后，由关系词（关系代词或关系副词）引出。
关系代词有：who, whom, whose, that, which, as。
关系副词有：when, where, why, how。
关系代词和关系副词放在先行词和定语从句之间，起连接作用，同时又可做定语从句的一个成分。当关系代词做宾语时可以省略。
定语从句中的谓语动词必须在人称上和数量上和先行词保持一致。
定语从句分为限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句。
1 、关系代词引导的定语从句
1) who, whom, that 这些词代替的先行词是人的名词或代词，在从句中所起作用如下：
Is he the man who/that wants to see you?（who/that在从句中作主语）
He is the man whom/ that I saw yesterday.（whom/that在从句中作宾语）
2) whose 用来指人或物，（只用作定语，若指物，它还可以同of which互换），例如：
Please pass me the book whose (of which) cover is green.
3) which, that 它们所代替的先行词是事物的名词或代词，在从句中可作主语、宾语等，例如：
A prosperity which / that had never been seen before appears in the countryside.（which / that在句中作宾语）
The package (which / that) you are carrying is about to come unwrapped. (which / that在句中作宾语)
关系代词that和which 都可以指物，that 和Who 都可以指人，其用法区别：
不用that的情况：
a) 在引导非限定性定语从句时
(错)The tree, that is four hundred years old, is very famous here.
b) 介词后不能用
We depend on the land from which we get our food.
c) 多用who 的情况
①关系代词在从句中做主语
A friend who helps you in time of need is a real friend.
②先行词为those, people 时
Those who were either fools or unfit for their offices could not see the cloth.
③先行词为all, anyone, ones, one 指人时
One who doesn't work hard will never succeed in his work.
④在There be句型中
There is a stranger who wants to see you.
⑤在被分隔的定语从句中
A new teacher will come tomorrow who will teach you German.
⑥在有两个定语从句的句子中，其一用 who，其二用 that,但若先行词后接两个以上的并列定语从句时，后一个必须重
复前一个关系代词。
The student who was praised at the meeting is the monitor that is very modest and studies very hard.
There is a teacher who is always ready to help others and who enjoys what he does.
2) 只能用that作为定语从句的关系代词的情况
a)在不定代词，如：anything, nothing, everything, all, much, few, any, little等作先行词时，只用that，不用which。
All that is needed is a supply of oil.
Finally, the thief handed everything that he had stolen to the police.
b)先行词有the only, the very, the just修饰时，只用that。
He is the very man that helped the girl out of the water.
c)先行词为序数词(the last)、数词、形容词最高级时，只用that。
The first English book that I read was "The Prince and the Pauper" by Mark Twin.d)先行词既有人，又有物时。
He talked about the teachers and schools that he visited.
e)当主句是以who 或which 开始的特殊疑问句时，用that 以避免重复。
Who is the person that is standing at the gate.
f)关系代词在从句中做表语
He is not the man that he used to be.
2 、关系副词引导的定语从句
关系副词可代替的先行词是时间、地点、方式或理由的名词，在从句中作状语。
关系副词when, where, why, how的含义相当于"介词+ which"结构，因此常常和"介词+ which"结构交替使用，例如：
There are occasions when (on which) one must yield.
Beijing is the place where (in which) I was born.
Is this the reason why (for which) he refused our offer?
I'm surprised the way how (by which) he works out the problem.
注意：
①在非限制性定语从句中，"介词+ which"结构不能代替关系副词。
如：They set up a state for their own , where they would be free to keep Negroes as slaves.
②含有介词短语的动词一般不能拆开，介词仍放在动词后面。
Is this the book which (that) she was looking for?
3、名词/数词/代词 /形容词最高级 + 介词 + 关系代词引导定语从句
She has written a book , the name of which I have forgotten.
There are fifty-five students in our class , all of whom are working hard.
There are five continents in the world , the largest of which is Asia.
4、as, which 引导非限定性定语从句的差别
由as, which 引导的非限定性定语从句，as和which可代整个主句，相当于and this或and that。As一般放在句首，which
在句中。
As we know, smoking is harmful to one's health.
The sun heats the earth, which is very important to us.
as可引导非限制性从句，常带有“正如”的意思。
As is know, smoking is harmful to one's health.
用法区别：
(1) as 引导的定语从句可置于句首，而which不可。
As we all know, he never smokes.
(2) as 代表前面的整个主句并在从句中作主语时，从句中的谓语必须是系动词；若为行为动词，则从句中的关系代词只
能用which。
(3)非限定性定语从句中出现expect, think, suppose 等表示猜测、想象、预料等时。
She succeeded in her doing the research work , as we expected.
(4)As 的用法 the same… as; such…as 中的as 是一种固定结构, 和……一样……。
I should like to use the same tool as is used here.
We should have such a dictionary as he is using.定语从句语法专项练习习题精选
用适当的关系词填空：
1. I still remember the night _______I first came to the house.
2. I'll never forget the day________ we met each other last week.
3. Mr Black is going to Beijing in October, _______is the best season there.
4. I will never forget the days _______I spent with your family.
5. I'll never forget the last day______ we spent together.
6. This is the school ______I used to study.
7. Do you still remember the place______ we visited last week?
8. Do you still remember the place_______ we visited the painting exhibition?
9. Have you ever been to Hangzhou,_____is famous for the West Lake?
10. Have you ever bee to Hangzhou, ______lies the West Lake?
11. Tom will go to Shanghai,______live his two brothers.
12. I live in Beijing,____is the capital of China.
13. There was a time ______there were slaves in the USA.
14. It is the third time ______you have made the same mistake.
15. It was in the street _____I met John yesterday.
16. It was about 600 years ago____the first clock with a face and an hour hand was made.
17. The moment _____I saw you, I recognized(认出)you.
18. This is the very novel about____we've talked so much.
19. This is the way____he did it.
20. Who is the student _____was late for school today?
21. Who _____knows him wants to make friends with him?
22. What else was there in my brother____you didn't like?
23. He lives in the room____window faces to the south.
24. He lives in the room, the window_____faces to the south.
25. This is Mr. John for____son I brought a book yesterday.
26. This is Mr. John for_____I bought a book yesterday.
27. This is the hour_____the place is always full of women and children.
28. And there is one point ______I'd like your advice.
29. Winter is the time of year______the days are short and nights are long.
30. I hope you will find this valley a beautiful place____you may spend your weekend.
KEYS:
1. when 2. when 3. which 4. that/which 5. that
6. where 7. that/which 8. where 9. which 10. where
11. where 12. which 13. when 14. that 15. that
16. that 17. (that) 18. which 19. (that/in which) 20.that
21.that 22 that 23.whose 24. of which 25. whose
26. whom 27. when 28. that 29. that 30. where第二十一章 被动语态
一、语态概述
英语的语态是通过动词形式的变化表现出来的。英语中有两种语态：主动语态和被动语态。
主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者。巧记为：主动、主动、主去动。
被动语态表示主语是动作的承受者，即行为动作的对象。巧记为：被动、被动、主被动。例如：
English is spoken by many people.主语English是动词speak的承受者。
主动态和被动态指的是动词形式，是词法概念；而主动句和被动句则指的是句子结构，从而是句法概念。所谓主动
句就是由主动态动词(词组)作谓语动词的句子，而被动句则是由被动态动词(词组)作谓语动词的句子。例如：
He opened the door.他开了门。(主动句)
The door was opened.门被开了。(被动句)
二、被动语态的构成
被动语态由“助动词be＋及物动词的过去分词”构成。人称、数和时态的变化是通过be的变化表现出来的。现以
teach为例说明被动语态在各种时态中的构成。
一般现在时：am／is／are＋taught
一般过去时：was／were＋taught
一般将来时：will／shall be＋taught
现在进行时：am／is／are being＋taught
过去进行时：have／has been＋taught
现在完成时：have／has been＋taught
记忆歌诀：被动语态be字变，过去分词跟后面。
注意：区分被动语态与“be+过去分词”结构
be+过去分词”并不一定都是被动语态，有时是系表结构。当“be+过去分词”表示动作时为被动语态，be 是助动
词，be后面的过去分词是主要动词，动作的对象是主语；当“be +过去分词”表示主语所处的状态时为系表结构，be是
连系动词。be后面的过去分词是表语，相当于形容词。其区分办法如下：
1 如果强调动作或句中有介词by引导出动作的执行者，该句一般为被动语态，否则为系表结构。例如:The glass is
broken.玻璃杯碎了。(系表结构) The glass was broken by the boy.玻璃杯被那男孩打碎了。(被动语态)
2 如果句中有地点、频率或时间状语时，一般为被动语态。如：The magazine is published in Shanghai.这家杂志出
版于上海。(被动语态)The door is locked.门锁着。(系表结构)The door has already/just been locked.门已经/刚刚被锁上。
(被动语态)The shop is opened.这家商店开门了。(系表结构) The shop is opened at 8 a.m. everyday.这家商店每天上午八点开门。(被动语态)
3 被动语态除用于一般时态和完成时态外，还可以用于其他各种时态，而系表结构中的系动词be只有一般时态和
完成时态。
三、被动语态的用法
1 不知道或没有必要说明动作的执行者是谁。例如：
1) Some new computers were stolen last night.
一些新电脑在昨晚被盗了。(不知道电脑是谁偷的)
2) This book was published in 1981.这本书出版于1981年。
2 强调动作的承受者，而不强调动作的执行者。例如：
1) This book was written by him.这本书是他写的。
2) Eight hours per day for sleep must be guaranteed.每天8小时睡眠必须得到保证。
记忆歌诀：谁做的动作不知道，说出谁做的没有必要；动作承受者需强调，被动语态运用到。
四、主动语态变被动语态的方法
1 把主动语态的宾语变为被动语态的主语。
2 把谓语变成被动结构(be＋过去分词)，根据被动语态句子里的主语的人称和数，以及原来主 动语态句子中动词
的时态来决定be的形式。
3 把主动语态中的主语放在介词by之后作宾语，将主格改为宾格。例如：
1) All the people laughed at him.= He was laughed at by all people.
2) They make the bikes in the factory.= The bikes are made by them in the factory.
记忆歌诀：宾变主，主变宾，by短语后面跟。谓语动词变被动，be后“过分”来使用。
五、含有情态动词的被动语态
含有情态动词的主动句变成被动句时，由“情态动词＋be＋过去分词”构成，原来带 to 的情态动词变成被动语态
后“to”仍要保留。
记忆歌诀：情态动词变动，情态加be加“过分”，原来带to要保留。例如：
1) We can repair this watch in two days. = This watch can be repaired in two days.
2) You ought to take it away. = It ought to be taken away.
3) They should do it at once. = It should be done at once
第二十二章 高中英语语法中的省略现象在英语语言中，为了使语言简洁明了，重点突出或上下文紧密相连，可以省去某些句子成分而保持句子愿意不变，
这种语言现象称之为省略。现就英语中的种种省略现象分析如下：
一、并列复合句中的省略
在并列句中后边的分句可以省略与前边分句中相同的成分。如：
a) The boy picked up a coin in the road and (the boy ) handed it to a policeman. 这个男孩在马路上拾起一枚硬币并把他交给
了警察。
b) Your advice made me happy but(your advice made) Tom angry .你的建议使我高兴但使汤姆生气。
c) Tom must have been playing basketball and Mary (must have been)doing her homework. 汤姆肯定一直在打篮球，玛丽一
直在写作业。
d) Gao Xiumin was born in 1959 and Fu Biao (was born) in 1963.高秀敏出生于1959年，傅彪出生于1963年。
二、主从复合句中的省略
1．状语从句中的省略
一般说来省略现象多出现在下列五种状语从句中：由 when ,while ,as ,before, after , till, until, once等引导的时间状
语从句；由whether ,if , unless 等引导的条件状语从句；由though , although ,even if ,whatever等引导的让步状语从句；
由 as ,than 等引导的比较状语从句；由as, as if , as though 等引导的方式状语从句。上述状语从句在省略时应遵循下面
原则：
1) 当状语从句的主语与主句的主语一致时，可以省略状语从句的主语和系动词be，这时从句中可出现如下结构：(1) 连
词（as, as if , once）+ 名词; (2) 连词（ though, whether , when）+形容词；(3) 连词(whether, as if ,while )+介词短语；
(4) 连词(when , while , though )+ 现在分词； (5) 连词(when ,if ,even if ,unless ,once ,until, than , as ) + 过去分词； (6) 连
词(as if ,as though ) + 不定式。如：
a) Once (he was)a worker ,Pang Long now becomes a famous singer .庞龙曾经是个工 人，现在变成一位著名的歌手。
b) Work hard when (you are) young ,or you'll regret.趁年轻要努力学习，要不然你会后悔的。
c) He looked everywhere as if (he was)in search of something .他到处看似乎在找什么东西。
d) While (he was) holding talks with President Hu Jintao ,US President George W. Bush thanked China for its important role in
the Six-Party Talks.美国总统布什在与胡锦涛主席会谈时，感谢中国在六方会谈中起的重要作用。
e) The exhibition is more interesting than (it was) expected .这次展览比被预料的有趣的多。
f) Olympic gold medallist hurdler Liu Xiang opened his lips as if (he were) to speak。奥林匹克金牌获得者跨栏运动员刘翔张
开嘴好像要说什么。
注意：
1) 当从句的主语和主句的宾语一致时，间或也有这样的省略,如：
Her father told her to be careful when (she was)crossing the street.当她过马路时父亲告诉她要当心。
2) 当从句的主语是 it，谓语动词中又含有系动词be 时 ，可以把it和系动词be一起省略。此时构成连词(if , unless ,when ,
whenever)+形容词的结构。如：
Unless (it is) necessary ,you'd better not refer to the dictionary.如果没有必要，你最好不要查字典。
2．定语从句中的省略
1） 一般说来，在限制性定语从句中，作宾语的关系代词 that ,which , whom 可以省略；如：
Is this reason (that) he explained at the meeting for his carelessness in his work?这就是他在会上解释他工作中粗心的原因
吗？（2002上海春季）
而在非限制性定语从句中作宾语的关系代词 which , whom 不可以省略。试比较：
Tom (whom) you saw yesterday fell ill.( whom可以省) 你昨天见到的汤姆病倒了。
Tom , whom you saw yesterday ,fell ill. ( whom不可以省) 汤姆病倒了，你昨天见到他了。
2）在口语和非正式用语中，关系副词when ,where , 和 why 经常用that 来代替，甚至还可省略。如：a) This is the first time (when/that)he had trouble with the boss.这是他第一次麻烦老板。
b) He wants to find a good place (where/that) we can have a picnic during the “golden week ”holiday .他想找一个能在黄
金周期间野餐的好地方。
c) Could you tell us the reason (why/that)he was so unhappy ? 你能告诉我们他为什么如此不高兴吗？
3）当先行词为表示方式的 the way 时 ，从句不能用 how 来引导 ，应该用that 或 in which ，或将它们全部省略。
如：
I don't like the way (that/in which) you laugh at her.我不喜欢你嘲笑他的行为。
3．宾语从句中的省略
1）在及物动词后面所接的宾语从句中，连词that 一般可以省略；但如果及物动词后面是由that引导的两个或两个以上
的并列的宾语从句 ，那么只有第一个that可以省略。如：
a) I think (that) the reform of the renminbi's exchange rate is necessary. 我认为人民币兑换率的改革是必要的。
b) He said (that)the Anti-secession law had been passed and that President Hu Jintao had signed a presidential order 他说《 反
分裂国家法》已被通过，而且胡锦涛主席已签署了主席令。
2）由 which , when ,where , how,和 why 引导的 宾语从句，可以全部或部分省略。如：
a) I know that NBA star Yao Ming will come to our city but I don’t know when (he will come to our city).我知道NBA明星
要到我们城市来但我不知道他什么时候来。
b) He wants to move abroad but his parents wonders why (he wants to move abroad)他想搬迁到国外但他的父母想知道为什
么。
4．在与suggest ,request ,order ,advise 等词相关的名词性从句中，须用虚拟语气形式“should +动词原形”，should可以
省略。如：
Chirac, President of the Republic of France suggested that the China-France Culture Year (should) last long in various forms.法
国总统希拉克建议中法文化年以各种各样的形式长期持续。
5．主句省略多用于句首。如：
(It is a ) Pity that I didn’t go to Mary's birthday party yesterday.很遗憾，我昨天没有去参加玛丽的生日聚会。
6．在答语中，主句可全部省略。如：
—Why were you absent from school last Friday ?—(I was absent from school)Because my mother was ill. —上周五你为什
么没有上学？ —因为我妈妈病了。
三、简单句中的省略
1．省略主语
1）祈使句中的主语通常被省略 如：
(You) Open the door, please. 请开一下门。
2) 其它省略主语多限于现成的说法 如：
a) (I) Thank you for your help 谢谢你的帮助。
b) (It)Doesn’t matter.没关系。
2．省略主谓语或主谓语的一部分 如：
a) (There is) No smoking. 禁止抽烟
b) (Is there)anything else ? 还有其他事吗 ？
c) (You come)This way please.请这边走。
d) (Will you) Have a smoke ? 抽烟吗 ？
3．省略宾语 如：
—Do you know Mr. Li ? 你认识李先生吗？— I don’t know (him.) 我不认识他
4．省略表语 如：
—Are you thirsty ? 你30岁了吗？ Yes , I am (thirsty). 是的，我是。
5．同时省略几个成分 如：
a) —Are you feeling better now? 你觉得好些了吗 ？—(I am feeling ) Much better (now) 好多了。b) (I wish) Good luck (to you) .祝你好运/祝你顺利。
四、动词不定式省略，只保留to 的场合
1．不定式作某些动词的宾语时，这些动词常见的有：love, like, care, wish, hope, expect, prefer, refuse, mean , try , oblige ,
advise , persuade , agree , want , afford , forget , remember , try , manage等。如：
a)— You should have thanked her before you left . —I meant to ,but when I was leaving I couldn’t find her anywhere.—你
本该在离开前谢谢她。—我本打算这么做，但当我就要离开的时候我却找不到她了。（2000上海春）
b) You can do it this way if you like to .如果你想做，你可以这么做。
2．不定式作某些动词的宾语补足语或主语补足语时，这些动词常见的有：ask , tell ,advise, force, persuade, wish, allow,
permit , forbid ,expect, order ,warn 等。如 ：
a) The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street ,but his mother told him not to. 男孩想在街上骑他的自行车，但他母亲不
让。(NMET1995)
b) She wants to come but her parents won’t allow her to (come). 她想来，可是她父母不让。
3．不定式在句中作某些形容词的状语时，常见的形容词有：happy, glad ,eager , anxious , willing , ready 等。如：
— I will be away on a business trip .Could you mind looking after my cat ? — Not at all.I would be happy to (look
after your cat). —我要出差，你能帮我照顾一下我的猫吗？—没关系，我很愿意。
4．不定式作某些复合谓语时，常见结构如：be able to, be going to, have to, ought to, used to等。如：
He doesn’t like fish but he used to 他现在不喜欢吃鱼，但过去喜欢。
五、动词不定式to 的省略
1．主语部分有to do ,系动词 is 或 was 时 ，作表语的不定式通常省去to。如：
The only thing you have to do is press the button.你必须做的惟一事情是按按钮。
2．作介词but ,expect ,besides 的宾语，前面又有实意动词 do时，不定式通常省去to. 如：
He said that Chen Shuibian had nothing to do except push a pro-“independence” timetable.他说陈水扁除了推进支持“独
立”的时间表外，什么也没有做。
3．主语部分暗含to do，表语中的不定式通常省去to。如：
All I want (to do) is go to school and study hard .我想要（做）的就是上学，努力学习。
4．当两个或多个不定式并列时，其后的不定式符号可以省略，但有对比关系时不可省略。如：
It is easier to say than to do . 说起来容易，做起来难。
5．在would rather…than… 等结构中，不定式符号常常要省略. 如：
I would rather stay at home than go to see a film.我宁愿呆在家也不愿去看电影。
6．在see ,watch ,notice ,hear, listen to ,look at ,feel ,have, make, let ,observe 等词后作宾语补足语时省略不定式符号to；
why (not) do 结构 中, 不定式不带to。如：
a) I saw her enter the room. 我看见她进入了房间
b) Why not join us ?为什么不加入到我们的行列里来呢？
六．其他一些省略结构
1．名词所有格修饰的名词，若表示住宅、店铺、教堂或上下文已暗示或明确指出过的事物时，常常可以省略。如：
We spent the weekend at the Mary's. 我们在玛丽家过的周末。
2．What和 how引导的感叹句中，常可省略主语 it 和be动词 如：
a) What a wonderful victory (it is ) for Tom ! 这对Tom来说是个多么大的胜利呀！
b) How beautiful (it is ) to be treated like a normal child. 被当作一个正常孩子对待对他而言是多么美妙的一件事呀。
